1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Index idx
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
504 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
515 \begin_layout Chapter
516 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
520 \begin_layout Section
521 Basic File Operations
522 \begin_inset Index idx
525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
534 \begin_layout Standard
539 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
540 in addition to some more advanced operations:
543 \begin_layout Itemize
565 \begin_layout Itemize
581 arg "buffer-new-template"
587 \begin_layout Itemize
609 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
633 \begin_layout Itemize
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "buffer-write-as"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
701 \begin_layout Standard
702 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
703 a few minor differences.
706 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
717 command lists the available templates.
718 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
719 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
720 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
728 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
735 \begin_layout Standard
736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
769 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
770 is just that — a big, blank space.
778 \begin_layout Standard
799 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
804 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
807 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
825 will reload the document from disk.
826 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
827 and want to restore it to the last save.
836 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
837 them as your changes.
840 \begin_layout Section
841 Basic Editing Features
842 \begin_inset Index idx
845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
854 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
861 \begin_layout Standard
862 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
863 can perform cut and paste operations
864 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
865 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
866 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
867 editing features and how to access
869 We will start with cut and paste.
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 As you might expect, the
877 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
878 various other editing features.
879 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
883 \begin_layout Itemize
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
921 \begin_layout Itemize
927 \begin_inset Index idx
930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
959 \begin_layout Itemize
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1039 \begin_inset Index idx
1042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1057 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 The first three are self-explanatory.
1075 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1076 and other programs by
1097 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1098 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1103 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1104 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1105 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1106 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1107 into individual cells.
1111 \begin_inset space ~
1116 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1117 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1121 \begin_layout Standard
1125 \begin_inset space ~
1130 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1132 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1134 \begin_inset space ~
1141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1147 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1148 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1149 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1155 \begin_inset space \space{}
1158 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1159 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1162 \begin_inset space ~
1165 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1184 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1185 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1187 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1191 \begin_inset space ~
1196 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1197 start a new paragraph.
1198 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1199 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1204 \begin_inset space ~
1207 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1224 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1227 paste from the primary selection.
1228 This is normally the currently selected text.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1240 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1258 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1264 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1281 button to skip the current word.
1285 \begin_inset space ~
1290 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1299 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1301 If the toggle is set, searching for
1302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1313 will not match the word
1314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 Match whole words only
1330 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1331 to only find complete words, e.
1332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1361 offers also an advanced
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1368 \begin_inset space ~
1373 feature that is described in section
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1380 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1387 \begin_layout Standard
1388 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1389 \begin_inset space \space{}
1393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1403 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1408 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1419 arg "inset-select-all"
1422 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1423 When the cursor is inside an inset
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 selects the content of the inset.
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1441 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1444 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1448 \begin_layout Section
1450 \begin_inset Index idx
1453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1472 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1479 \begin_layout Standard
1480 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1482 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1488 or the toolbar button
1494 to undo some mistake.
1495 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1497 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1500 or the toolbar button
1507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1514 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1518 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1521 \begin_layout Standard
1522 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1531 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1532 This is a consequence of the 100
1533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1536 step undo limit mentioned above.
1539 \begin_layout Standard
1548 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1550 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1554 \begin_layout Section
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1572 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 \begin_layout Itemize
1582 once anywhere in the edit window.
1583 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1587 \begin_layout Enumerate
1592 \begin_layout Itemize
1599 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1605 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1606 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1609 \begin_layout Itemize
1610 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1620 \begin_layout Enumerate
1621 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1625 \begin_layout Standard
1626 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1627 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1631 \begin_layout Section
1633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1635 name "sec:Navigating"
1640 \begin_inset Index idx
1643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1652 \begin_layout Standard
1654 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1727 \begin_layout Subsection
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1740 Navigating ! Outline
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1759 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1760 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1761 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1763 \begin_inset space ~
1767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1769 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1773 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1780 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1785 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1789 \begin_layout Standard
1790 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1791 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1792 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1793 dialog and to modify the citation.
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1799 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1800 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1808 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1813 you further to control the display.
1818 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1819 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1825 option keeps it in the current view state.
1826 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1827 \begin_inset space ~
1830 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1831 \begin_inset space ~
1834 3, the subsections of sections
1835 \begin_inset space ~
1838 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1843 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1848 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1868 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1869 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1883 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1884 So, for example, you can move section
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1892 2.4 or after section
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1898 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 (or the corresponding key bindings
1919 ) you can change the level of sections.
1920 So you can for example make section
1921 \begin_inset space ~
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_layout Subsection
1936 Horizontal Scrolling
1937 \begin_inset Index idx
1940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1941 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1951 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1957 \begin_inset space \space{}
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1964 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1965 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1966 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1970 \begin_layout Standard
1971 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1975 \begin_layout Itemize
1977 is used on a small tablet computer
1980 \begin_layout Itemize
1981 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_inset space ~
2006 \begin_layout Itemize
2007 Math constructs with long command names
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2012 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2014 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2015 windows so that table
2016 \begin_inset space ~
2020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2022 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2027 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2029 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2030 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2033 \begin_layout Standard
2034 \begin_inset Float table
2040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2041 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2046 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2050 Horizontal scrolling test.
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Tabular
2061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 \begin_layout Section
2108 Input/Word Completion
2109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2111 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2116 \begin_inset Index idx
2119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_layout Standard
2162 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2164 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2165 is used to propose completions.
2168 \begin_layout Standard
2169 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2172 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2177 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2184 \begin_inset space ~
2188 \begin_inset space ~
2193 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2202 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2203 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2213 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2214 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2215 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2216 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2219 \begin_layout Standard
2221 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2222 completions available.
2227 key to accept a proposed completion.
2228 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2229 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2230 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2238 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2239 ing options for text.
2240 The special math option
2244 enables characters to be composed.
2245 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2246 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2249 , you can then input the characters
2250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2261 to a formula to get it.
2262 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2263 of the math toolbar.
2264 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2268 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2269 's installation folder.
2270 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2279 \begin_layout Section
2281 \begin_inset Index idx
2284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2323 \begin_inset Index idx
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2372 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2375 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2379 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2386 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2393 \begin_layout Standard
2397 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset space ~
2426 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2430 \begin_layout Labeling
2431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2435 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2436 LatexCommand nomenclature
2438 description "Tabulator key"
2444 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2446 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2447 \begin_inset space ~
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2453 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2460 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2464 , especially section
2465 \begin_inset space ~
2469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2471 reference "subsec:Lists"
2477 If you are still confused, look in the
2482 \begin_inset Newline newline
2490 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2491 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2495 \begin_layout Labeling
2496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2501 LatexCommand nomenclature
2503 description "Escape key"
2510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2518 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2521 \begin_layout Labeling
2522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2528 \begin_inset space ~
2532 \begin_inset space ~
2539 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2540 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2544 \begin_layout Standard
2545 There are three modifier keys:
2548 \begin_layout Labeling
2549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2567 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2568 LatexCommand nomenclature
2570 description "Control key"
2574 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2575 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2579 \begin_layout Itemize
2588 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2591 \begin_layout Itemize
2600 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2616 \begin_layout Labeling
2617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2635 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2636 LatexCommand nomenclature
2638 description "Shift key"
2642 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2643 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2646 \begin_layout Labeling
2647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2666 LatexCommand nomenclature
2668 description "Alt or Meta key"
2672 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2673 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2674 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2680 \begin_inset Newline newline
2683 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2685 menu accelerator keys
2688 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2689 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2694 For example, the sequence
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2701 \begin_inset space ~
2705 \begin_inset space ~
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2754 \begin_layout Standard
2759 manual lists all other things bound to the
2767 \begin_layout Standard
2768 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2770 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2771 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2772 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2773 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2774 The \SpecialChar LyX
2775 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2776 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2777 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2779 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2795 followed by a capital
2802 \begin_layout Chapter
2805 \begin_inset Index idx
2808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2818 \begin_layout Section
2820 \begin_inset Index idx
2823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2832 \begin_layout Subsection
2836 \begin_layout Standard
2837 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2838 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2839 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2840 numbering schemes, and so on.
2841 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2842 and format the title of your document differently.
2845 \begin_layout Standard
2850 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2851 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2852 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2853 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2854 picks one for you by default.
2855 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_inset Index idx
2863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2872 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2879 \begin_layout Standard
2880 You can select a class using the
2882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 Article for basic articles
2915 \begin_layout Description
2916 Report for basic reports
2919 \begin_layout Description
2920 Book for writing a book
2923 \begin_layout Description
2924 Letter for US-style letters
2927 \begin_layout Standard
2928 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2929 only uses if you have installed
2930 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2931 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 distributions will include
2934 Here are some of the classes.
2935 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2937 Special Document Classes
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2955 \begin_layout Description
2956 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2962 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2963 There are three article layouts available.
2964 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2965 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2966 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2967 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 sequential numbering
2973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2977 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2978 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2979 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 Beamer Layout for presentations
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2988 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2989 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2990 with \SpecialChar LyX
2994 \begin_layout Description
2995 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2998 \begin_layout Description
3000 \begin_inset space ~
3003 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Foils Used to make transparencies
3014 \begin_layout Description
3015 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3016 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3017 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3018 with \SpecialChar LyX
3022 \begin_layout Description
3023 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3024 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3027 \begin_layout Description
3028 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3037 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3038 (Is used by this document.)
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3049 \begin_layout Description
3054 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3055 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3057 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 Slides Used to make transparencies
3065 \begin_layout Description
3067 \begin_inset space ~
3070 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3071 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3074 \begin_layout Description
3075 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3078 \begin_layout Standard
3079 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3081 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3083 Special Document Classes
3090 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3091 of the document classes.
3094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3098 \begin_layout Standard
3099 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3104 \begin_inset Index idx
3107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3124 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3125 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3127 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3130 \begin_layout Standard
3133 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3138 , are highly specialized.
3140 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3141 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3142 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3143 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3144 by some document class.
3145 There are just too many of them.
3146 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3149 \begin_layout Standard
3150 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3158 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3159 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3160 document class for a new file.
3162 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3165 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3172 manual for information on how to install them.
3173 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3179 \begin_layout Standard
3180 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3181 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3182 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3183 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3184 class files to be used for dissertation
3185 s submitted to those universities.
3186 The \SpecialChar LyX
3187 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3189 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3193 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3199 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3206 name "subsec:Modules"
3211 \begin_inset Index idx
3214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3225 chosen document class.
3226 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3227 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3252 \begin_layout Standard
3253 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3254 packages or file format converters that are not always
3255 installed by default.
3257 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3258 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3259 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3260 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3262 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3263 file without the missing prerequisites.
3264 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3265 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3268 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3272 \begin_inset Index idx
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3276 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3282 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3290 \begin_layout Standard
3291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3301 will advise you about these things.
3309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3313 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3318 \begin_inset Index idx
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Document ! Local Layout
3330 \begin_layout Standard
3331 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3332 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 : They are intended to be used in
3334 a variety of different documents.
3335 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3336 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3337 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3338 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3339 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3359 manual for information on how to use it.
3362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3366 \begin_layout Standard
3367 Each class has a default set of options.
3368 Here's a quick table describing them:
3371 \begin_layout Standard
3372 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3378 \begin_layout Standard
3380 \begin_inset Tabular
3381 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3382 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3383 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 \begin_layout Standard
3842 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 You're probably also wondering what
3850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3854 \begin_inset space ~
3858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3862 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3863 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3868 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3873 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3883 headings, there are also
3891 headings, and so on.
3892 We will describe these headings fully in section
3893 \begin_inset space ~
3897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3899 reference "subsec:Headings"
3906 \begin_layout Subsection
3908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3910 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3915 \begin_inset Index idx
3918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3947 \begin_inset space ~
3955 \begin_inset space ~
3960 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3962 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3963 doesn't support special options you want to
3964 use for your document.
3965 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3966 -class and its options, you have to read
3970 \begin_layout Standard
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3993 You can choose between the following five options:
3996 \begin_layout Labeling
3997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4002 Use default page style of current class.
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4011 No page numbers or headings.
4014 \begin_layout Labeling
4015 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4030 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4031 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4032 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4035 \begin_layout Labeling
4036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4041 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4042 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4048 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 -packages ! fancyhdr
4059 How they are defined is explained in section
4060 \begin_inset space ~
4064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4066 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4073 \begin_layout Standard
4074 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4075 \begin_inset space ~
4079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4081 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4088 \begin_layout Subsection
4089 Paper Size and Orientation
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4094 Document ! Paper size
4100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4102 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4109 \begin_layout Standard
4110 You can find the following options in the menu
4113 \begin_inset space ~
4120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4124 \begin_inset Index idx
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4136 \begin_layout Labeling
4137 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4141 \begin_inset space ~
4146 What size paper to print on.
4151 \begin_layout Itemize
4157 \begin_layout Itemize
4163 \begin_layout Itemize
4169 \begin_layout Itemize
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4178 US letter, US legal, US executive
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Labeling
4195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4200 To choose whether to output as
4211 \begin_layout Labeling
4212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4216 \begin_inset space ~
4221 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4222 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4225 \begin_layout Subsection
4227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4229 name "subsec:Margins"
4234 \begin_inset Index idx
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4256 \begin_layout Standard
4257 Paper margins are set in the menu
4259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4263 \begin_inset Index idx
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_layout Standard
4276 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4277 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4278 the paper format and the font size into account.
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4292 That includes the paragraph environments.
4293 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4294 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4295 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4297 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4308 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4309 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4310 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4313 \begin_layout Section
4314 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4315 \begin_inset Index idx
4318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4319 Paragraph ! Indentation
4327 \begin_layout Subsection
4329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4331 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4338 \begin_layout Standard
4339 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4340 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4343 \begin_layout Standard
4344 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4345 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4346 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4347 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4351 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4357 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4358 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4359 language than English.
4361 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4364 \begin_layout Standard
4365 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4366 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4367 into \SpecialChar LyX
4369 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4372 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4374 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4375 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4376 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4383 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4384 goes to produce a printable file.
4389 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4391 gives you the ability globally to change
4395 these pre-coded spacings.
4396 We will explain more later.
4399 \begin_layout Subsection
4400 Paragraph Separation
4401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4403 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4412 Paragraph ! Separation
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4436 \begin_inset space ~
4443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4447 \begin_inset Index idx
4450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4456 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4459 \begin_layout Subsection
4463 \begin_layout Standard
4464 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4467 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4469 \begin_inset space ~
4474 dialog and toggle the
4477 \begin_inset space ~
4482 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4485 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4489 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4490 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4496 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4499 \begin_layout Subsection
4501 \begin_inset Index idx
4504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4505 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4520 \begin_inset Index idx
4523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4536 \begin_inset space ~
4545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4546 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 -packages ! setspace
4562 installed to use this feature.
4567 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4571 \begin_inset space ~
4576 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4577 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4580 \begin_layout Section
4581 Paragraph Environments
4582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4584 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4589 \begin_inset Index idx
4592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 Paragraph ! Environments
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph environments|(
4611 \begin_layout Subsection
4615 \begin_layout Standard
4616 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4638 \begin_inset Newline newline
4641 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4643 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4645 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4654 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4657 \begin_layout Standard
4658 A paragraph environment is simply a
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4667 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4668 scheme, labels, and so on.
4669 Additionally, you can
4670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4677 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4678 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4679 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4680 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4682 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4684 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4687 \begin_layout Standard
4688 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4689 \begin_inset Graphics
4690 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4696 at the left end of the toolbar.
4698 will change the environment of the
4702 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4703 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4704 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4708 \begin_layout Standard
4717 create a new paragraph using the
4721 paragraph environment.
4723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4730 because if you are in one of these environments:
4733 \begin_layout Itemize
4739 \begin_layout Itemize
4745 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Standard
4777 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4781 , rather than resetting it to
4786 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4793 reference "sec:Nesting"
4800 \begin_layout Subsection
4804 \begin_layout Standard
4805 The default paragraph environment is
4810 It creates a plain paragraph.
4812 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4813 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4814 this manual) are in the
4821 \begin_layout Standard
4822 You can nest a paragraph using the
4826 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4834 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4850 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4859 for thanks or contact information.
4860 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4861 places all of this on a separate page
4862 along with today's date.
4863 For other types of documents, the title
4864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4871 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4877 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4891 Here's how you use them:
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 Put the title of your document in the
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4903 Put the author name in the
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4912 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4918 Note that using this environment is optional.
4919 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4920 will automatically insert today's date.
4921 If you don't want a date, use the option
4923 Suppress default date on front page
4927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4928 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4930 \begin_inset space ~
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4939 You can use footnotes to insert
4940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4947 or contact information.
4950 \begin_layout Subsection
4952 \begin_inset Index idx
4955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4964 name "subsec:Headings"
4971 \begin_layout Standard
4972 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4974 takes care of the numbering for you.
4977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4983 Section headings ! Numbered
4991 \begin_layout Standard
4992 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4996 \begin_layout Enumerate
5002 \begin_layout Enumerate
5008 \begin_layout Enumerate
5014 \begin_layout Enumerate
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Standard
5040 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5041 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5042 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5045 \begin_layout Standard
5046 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5047 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5048 You group the book into chapters.
5050 does a similar grouping:
5053 \begin_layout Itemize
5058 is divided into either
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Standard
5130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5138 Not all document types use the
5142 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5147 is the top-level heading.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5160 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5161 labels it with its number,
5162 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5164 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5182 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5190 \begin_layout Standard
5191 The unnumbered section headings have a
5192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 at the end of their name.
5200 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5201 the table of contents, see section
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5216 Changing the Numbering
5217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5219 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5226 \begin_layout Standard
5227 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5228 in the Table of Contents.
5229 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5231 Just as certain classes start with
5245 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5255 This is something you can change.
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5265 \begin_inset Index idx
5268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5277 \begin_inset space ~
5281 \begin_inset space ~
5286 you will see two counters.
5291 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5292 numbers a section heading.
5293 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5298 Short Titles of Headings
5299 \begin_inset Index idx
5302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 Section headings ! Short titles
5309 \begin_inset Argument 1
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5329 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5330 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5331 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5332 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5335 \begin_layout Standard
5337 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5338 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5339 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5340 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5345 \begin_inset space ~
5351 This will insert a box labeled
5352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5356 \begin_inset space ~
5360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5363 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5364 This also works for captions inside floats.
5365 There can only be one short title per title.
5368 \begin_layout Standard
5369 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The following information applies to all section headings:
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5389 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5392 \begin_layout Itemize
5393 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5396 \begin_layout Subsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5402 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5416 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5417 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5418 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5419 the text they contain.
5420 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5428 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5432 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5441 when you start a new paragraph.
5442 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5446 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5447 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5448 have to change back to the
5452 environment yourself.
5455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5476 \begin_layout Standard
5477 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5478 time for the differences.
5487 are identical except for one difference:
5491 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5500 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Here's an example of the
5517 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5519 See – no indentation!
5523 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5524 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5525 the other paragraph.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's another example, this time in the
5536 \begin_layout Quotation
5542 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5543 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5544 the first line, then
5548 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5552 you were quoting other text.
5555 \begin_layout Quotation
5556 Here's a new paragraph.
5557 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5558 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5562 As the examples show,
5566 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5567 They should put quotes in the
5572 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5576 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5610 \begin_layout Standard
5615 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5621 \begin_inset Newline newline
5624 Which I did not rehearse!
5628 It could be much worse.
5629 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5631 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5632 indented a bit more than the first.
5633 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5639 \begin_inset Newline newline
5642 And make things look fine
5643 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 arg "newline-insert newline"
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5660 does not indent both margins.
5661 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5662 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5665 arg "newline-insert newline"
5671 \begin_layout Subsection
5673 \begin_inset Index idx
5676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5694 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5704 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5705 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 lets you provide your own label.
5716 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5717 describing some general features of all four of them.
5720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5725 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5727 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5737 reset the environment to
5741 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5742 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5743 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5751 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5758 \begin_layout Standard
5759 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5760 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5761 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5763 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5764 you read all of section
5765 \begin_inset space ~
5769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5771 reference "sec:Nesting"
5778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5780 \begin_inset Index idx
5783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5800 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5804 paragraph environment.
5805 It has the following properties:
5808 \begin_layout Itemize
5809 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5813 \begin_layout Itemize
5815 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5824 The items can have any length.
5826 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5827 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 environment inside another
5843 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5851 \begin_layout Itemize
5853 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5856 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 \begin_inset space ~
5862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5864 reference "sec:Nesting"
5868 for a full explanation of nesting.
5872 \begin_layout Standard
5873 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5882 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5885 \begin_layout Standard
5886 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5887 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5890 \begin_layout Itemize
5891 The label for the first level
5895 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5899 \begin_layout Itemize
5900 The label for the second level is a dash.
5904 \begin_layout Itemize
5905 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 Back out to the third level.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 Back to the second level.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back to the outermost level.
5928 \begin_layout Standard
5929 These are the default labels for an
5934 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5939 dialog in the submenu
5944 \begin_inset Index idx
5947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5957 \begin_layout Standard
5958 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5959 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5961 \begin_inset space ~
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5967 reference "sec:Nesting"
5974 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5988 name "sec:Enumerate"
5995 \begin_layout Standard
6000 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6001 It has these properties:
6004 \begin_layout Enumerate
6005 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6010 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6016 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6024 environment resets the counter to one.
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6042 Items can have any length.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6049 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6053 \begin_layout Enumerate
6054 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6067 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6069 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6070 labels the four different levels in an
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 The first level of an
6082 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6086 \begin_layout Enumerate
6087 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6091 \begin_layout Enumerate
6092 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 Back to the third level
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 Back to the second level.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the outermost level.
6120 \begin_layout Standard
6121 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6125 environment, see section
6126 \begin_inset space ~
6130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6132 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6137 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6141 \begin_layout Standard
6142 There is more to nesting
6146 environments than we've stated here.
6147 You should read section
6148 \begin_inset space ~
6152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6154 reference "sec:Nesting"
6158 to learn more about nesting.
6161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6163 \begin_inset Index idx
6166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6175 \begin_layout Standard
6176 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6180 list has no fixed label.
6181 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6190 of the first line as the label.
6194 \begin_layout Description
6195 Example: This is an example of the
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6204 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6208 \begin_layout Standard
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 it is meant that the first usage of the
6221 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6223 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6231 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6237 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6239 \begin_inset space ~
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6251 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6255 for more information.) Here is an example:
6258 \begin_layout Description
6260 \begin_inset space ~
6263 Example: This one shows how to use a
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6278 \begin_layout Description
6279 Usage: You should use the
6283 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6284 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6286 It's not a good idea to use a
6290 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6291 You're better off using
6303 paragraphs into them.
6306 \begin_layout Description
6307 Nesting: You can nest
6311 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6315 \begin_layout Standard
6316 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6317 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6318 them from the first line.
6321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6323 \begin_inset Index idx
6326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6340 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6341 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6354 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6356 Here are its properties:
6359 \begin_layout Labeling
6360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6362 \begin_inset space ~
6365 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6374 of each line as the item label.
6379 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6380 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6381 space as described above.
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6387 uses different margins for the item label and the
6388 body of the item text.
6389 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6390 label width plus a little extra space.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6397 \begin_inset space ~
6400 width \SpecialChar LyX
6401 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6402 If the label width is larger, the label
6403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6410 into the first line.
6411 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6412 margin of the rest of the item text.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 \begin_inset space ~
6421 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6426 environment has the same left margin.
6427 \begin_inset Newline newline
6430 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6440 dialog (toolbar button
6443 arg "layout-paragraph"
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6455 determines the default label width.
6456 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6465 multiple times instead.
6466 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6476 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6479 \begin_inset space ~
6484 every time you alter a label in a
6489 \begin_inset Newline newline
6492 The predefined default width is the length of
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6512 list the same way as the
6516 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6522 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6526 \begin_layout Standard
6531 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6532 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6534 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6540 reference "sec:Nesting"
6544 to learn about nesting.
6547 \begin_layout Standard
6548 There is yet another feature of the
6552 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6553 left-justifies the item labels by
6555 You can use additional
6559 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6560 justifies the item label.
6565 are documented in section
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6577 Here are some examples:
6580 \begin_layout Labeling
6581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6582 Left The default for
6589 \begin_layout Labeling
6590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6598 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6601 \begin_layout Labeling
6602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6614 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6617 \begin_layout Subsection
6619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6621 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6626 \begin_inset Index idx
6629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6639 The features described in this section require that the module
6641 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6643 is loaded in the document settings.
6644 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6655 -packages ! enumitem
6663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6664 Custom Enumerate Lists
6665 \begin_inset Index idx
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6677 \begin_layout Standard
6679 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6685 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6686 There you add the command
6689 \begin_layout Standard
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6710 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6711 Code, look at section
6712 \begin_inset space ~
6716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6718 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6731 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6738 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6739 For capital Roman numerals replace
6751 in the command above.
6752 For Arabic numerals use
6760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6767 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 You can only number 26
6793 \begin_inset space ~
6796 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6804 \begin_layout Standard
6805 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6806 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6813 \begin_layout Enumerate
6814 \begin_inset Argument 1
6817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6843 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 \begin_inset Argument 1
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6903 \begin_layout Enumerate
6904 \begin_inset Argument 1
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 For this list these commands were used:
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6948 \begin_inset Newline newline
6956 \begin_inset Newline newline
6964 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6981 makes the label emphasized and
6990 \begin_layout Standard
6991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7000 lists until you change the definition.
7008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7010 \begin_inset Index idx
7013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7049 \begin_inset Note Note
7052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 goes back to default numbering
7061 \begin_layout Enumerate
7065 \begin_layout Standard
7069 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7079 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7080 to indicate that it is a resumed
7081 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7082 , but in the output.
7085 \begin_layout Standard
7086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7094 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7104 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7106 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7107 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7108 of a normal enumeration.
7109 There, insert the command
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7123 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7131 \begin_layout Enumerate
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7139 \begin_layout Enumerate
7140 \begin_inset Argument 1
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7159 This enumeration starts at 4
7162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7164 \begin_inset Index idx
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7177 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7179 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7182 \begin_layout Itemize
7186 \begin_layout Itemize
7187 with standard spacing
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7191 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7193 Add there the command
7197 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7200 \begin_layout Itemize
7201 \begin_inset Argument 1
7204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7231 \begin_layout Standard
7232 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7239 \begin_inset Index idx
7242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7244 -packages ! enumitem
7250 For more information see its documentation,
7251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7261 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7263 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7264 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7268 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7271 \begin_layout Enumerate
7272 \begin_inset Argument 1
7275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 with negative indentation
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7301 Further Customization
7302 \begin_inset Index idx
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7306 Lists ! Customization
7314 \begin_layout Standard
7315 You can also change the style of description lists.
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7325 \begin_layout Standard
7326 changes the description label font, the command
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 sets the list style.
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 An example where the command
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7348 itshape, style=nextline
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7355 \begin_layout Description
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7361 \begin_inset Argument 1
7364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7382 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7383 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7392 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7393 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7394 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7397 \begin_layout Standard
7398 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7404 \begin_inset Index idx
7407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7409 -packages ! enumitem
7415 For more information see its documentation
7416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7425 \begin_layout Subsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7441 \begin_inset space ~
7444 Address: An Overview
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7448 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7449 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7457 \begin_inset space ~
7463 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7464 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7465 gags on the document.
7466 In contrast, you can use the
7473 \begin_inset space ~
7478 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7479 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7484 Of course, you're not limited to using
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7506 some European academic papers.
7509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7513 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7520 \begin_layout Standard
7525 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7526 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7530 \begin_inset space ~
7535 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7536 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7537 Here's an example of each:
7540 \begin_layout Right Address
7542 \begin_inset Newline newline
7546 \begin_inset Newline newline
7550 \begin_inset Newline newline
7553 When is it? What is today?
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7560 \begin_inset space ~
7566 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7568 the largest block of text on a single line.
7569 Here's an example of the
7576 \begin_layout Address
7578 \begin_inset Newline newline
7581 Where do I send this
7582 \begin_inset Newline newline
7585 Your post office and country
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 As you can see, both
7596 \begin_inset space ~
7601 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7606 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7607 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7613 This makes sense, since
7621 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7622 Thus, you have to use
7629 arg "newline-insert newline"
7634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7635 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7637 \begin_inset space ~
7641 \begin_inset space ~
7646 ) to start a new line in an
7653 \begin_inset space ~
7661 \begin_layout Subsection
7665 \begin_layout Standard
7666 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7667 or list of references.
7669 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7674 \begin_inset Index idx
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7691 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7692 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7693 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7694 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7708 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7709 The book document classes ignores the
7713 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7717 in a letter document class.
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment does several things for you.
7726 First, it puts the centered label
7727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7735 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7737 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7738 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7739 the subsequent text.
7740 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7742 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7747 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7751 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7752 The new paragraph will still be in the
7757 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7758 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7762 \begin_inset Float figure
7767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7769 \begin_inset Graphics
7770 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7783 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 We would love to demonstrate the
7809 environment, but since this document is in the
7810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7817 class, we can't do this.
7818 We inserted it therefore as figure
7819 \begin_inset space ~
7823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7825 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 If you have never heard of an
7831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7838 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7855 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7862 \begin_layout Standard
7867 environment is used to list references.
7868 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7869 only use it at the end of the document.
7881 \begin_layout Standard
7882 When you first open a
7886 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7887 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7903 depending on the document class.
7904 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7905 Each paragraph of the
7909 environment is a bibliography entry.
7914 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7915 Each new paragraph is still in the
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7924 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7926 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7928 handling, have a look at section
7929 \begin_inset space ~
7933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7935 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7942 \begin_layout Subsection
7943 Special Environments
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7948 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7949 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7957 \begin_inset Index idx
7960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7970 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7983 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7985 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7990 key as a fixed whitespace.
7994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8007 \begin_inset space ~
8012 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8030 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8033 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8036 arg "newline-insert newline"
8053 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8054 So, when you finish using the
8059 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8060 Also, you can nest the
8065 environment inside of others.
8068 \begin_layout Standard
8069 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8072 \begin_layout Itemize
8076 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8084 \begin_inset space \space{}
8094 arg "newline-insert newline"
8100 \begin_layout Itemize
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8114 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8120 \begin_layout Itemize
8121 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8122 You must put at least one
8126 in any line you want blank.
8127 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8131 \begin_layout Itemize
8132 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8136 since that will insert
8141 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8144 arg "self-insert \""
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8154 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8158 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8162 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8166 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8170 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 printf("Hello World!
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 This is just the standard
8186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8203 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8205 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8206 as if you used a typewriter.
8207 \begin_inset Index idx
8210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8211 Paragraph environments|)
8216 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8219 Program Code Listings
8224 \begin_inset space ~
8232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8248 \begin_layout Standard
8253 environment is similar to the
8258 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8259 computer console text.
8264 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8278 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8279 you can have empty lines.
8292 \begin_layout Itemize
8293 have a certain language and a text style
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8298 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8299 and \SpecialChar TeX
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8304 Because of these properties
8308 works like a typewriter.
8312 \begin_layout Verbatim
8317 \begin_layout Verbatim
8321 The following 2 lines are empty:
8324 \begin_layout Verbatim
8328 \begin_layout Verbatim
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8334 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8344 environment is identical to
8348 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8349 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8361 \begin_layout Section
8362 Nesting Environments
8363 \begin_inset Index idx
8366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8367 Nesting ! Environments
8373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8382 \begin_layout Subsection
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8388 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8390 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8392 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8394 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8406 \begin_layout Enumerate
8410 \begin_layout Enumerate
8415 \begin_layout Enumerate
8419 \begin_layout Enumerate
8424 \begin_layout Enumerate
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8430 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8432 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8434 \begin_inset space ~
8438 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_inset space ~
8450 \begin_inset space ~
8455 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8457 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8460 arg "depth-increment"
8466 arg "depth-decrement"
8480 arg "depth-increment"
8486 arg "depth-decrement"
8490 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8491 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8495 \begin_layout Standard
8496 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8497 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8498 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8499 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8500 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8503 \begin_layout Standard
8504 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8506 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8508 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8511 \begin_layout Subsection
8512 What You Can and Can't Nest
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8517 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8522 than a simple yes or no.
8523 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8526 \begin_layout Itemize
8527 Completely unnestable
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8542 environments have them:
8545 \begin_layout Description
8546 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8547 Can't nest into them.
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Description
8584 \begin_inset space ~
8587 Nestable You can nest them.
8588 You can nest other things into them.
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Itemize
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Description
8655 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8656 You can't nest anything into them.
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_inset space ~
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8764 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8774 \begin_inset space ~
8777 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8778 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8779 nested section headings violate this.
8787 \begin_layout Subsection
8788 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8789 \begin_inset Index idx
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8793 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8801 \begin_layout Standard
8802 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8803 affected by nesting anyhow.
8807 \begin_layout Itemize
8811 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Standard
8821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8829 Figures and tables in
8833 are not affected by this.
8838 Have a look at section
8839 \begin_inset space ~
8843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8845 reference "sec:Floats"
8849 for more information about
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8858 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8859 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8872 of its own, it behaves just like a
8873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8880 paragraph environment.
8881 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 Here's an example with a table:
8889 \begin_layout Enumerate
8894 \begin_layout Enumerate
8895 This is (a) and it's nested.
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8900 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_inset Tabular
8909 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8910 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8912 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 \begin_layout Standard
8997 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9004 \begin_layout Enumerate
9006 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9015 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9024 This is (a) and it's nested.
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9037 \begin_inset Tabular
9038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9039 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 \begin_layout Standard
9126 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9132 \begin_layout Enumerate
9139 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9142 \begin_layout Enumerate
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9155 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 This is (a) and it's nested.
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9176 \begin_inset Tabular
9177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9272 \begin_layout Enumerate
9274 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9281 \begin_layout Enumerate
9285 \begin_layout Standard
9286 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9292 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9293 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9297 \begin_layout Subsection
9298 Usage and General Features
9301 \begin_layout Standard
9302 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9303 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9312 is the innermost possible depth.
9313 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 level #1 – outermost
9321 \begin_layout Enumerate
9326 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9350 \begin_layout Standard
9351 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9352 both of them in the example.
9353 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9363 For example, if we tried to nest another
9368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9375 , we would get errors.
9378 \begin_layout Subsection
9380 \begin_inset Index idx
9383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9392 \begin_layout Standard
9393 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9394 We have several examples of nested environments.
9395 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9400 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9403 \begin_layout Labeling
9404 \labelwidthstring MMM
9405 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9414 \begin_layout Labeling
9415 \labelwidthstring MMM
9416 #2-a This is level #2.
9417 We created it by using
9420 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9426 arg "depth-increment"
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #3-a This is level #3.
9436 This time, we just enter
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9451 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9457 arg "depth-increment"
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9469 environment, nested inside of
9470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9478 So, it's at level #4.
9479 We did this by entering
9482 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9488 arg "depth-increment"
9491 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9496 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9517 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9526 \begin_layout Labeling
9527 \labelwidthstring MMM
9528 #4-a This is level #4.
9532 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9535 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9540 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9544 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9549 keep nesting things inside
9550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9561 \begin_layout Labeling
9562 \labelwidthstring MMM
9563 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9568 \begin_layout Labeling
9569 \labelwidthstring MMM
9570 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9571 and this is level #6.
9572 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9576 \begin_layout Labeling
9577 \labelwidthstring MMM
9578 #5-b Back to level #5.
9582 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9588 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9606 arg "depth-decrement"
9609 , we're back at level #4.
9613 \begin_layout Labeling
9614 \labelwidthstring MMM
9615 #3-b Back to level #3.
9616 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 #2-b Back to level #2.
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9629 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9630 After this sentence, we will enter
9634 and change the paragraph environment back to
9641 \begin_layout Standard
9642 We could have also used the
9658 environment in place of the
9663 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9667 Example 2: Inheritance
9670 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9671 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9674 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9683 arg "depth-increment"
9687 \begin_inset Newline newline
9690 which, we will change to the
9698 \begin_layout Enumerate
9703 environment, at level #2.
9706 \begin_layout Enumerate
9707 Notice how the nested
9711 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9715 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9719 \begin_layout Standard
9720 We ended this example by entering
9725 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9729 and reset the nesting depth by using
9732 arg "depth-decrement"
9738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9739 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9748 \begin_inset Argument 1
9751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9752 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9760 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 This is level #1, in an
9765 paragraph environment.
9766 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-increment"
9785 Now, what happens if we nest an
9789 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9790 label be? An asterisk?
9794 \begin_layout Itemize
9804 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9805 So, its label is a bullet.
9806 (We got here by using
9809 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9815 arg "depth-increment"
9818 , then changing the environment to
9826 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 Here's level #4, produced using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9840 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9845 \begin_layout Enumerate
9848 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9853 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9857 , because we are in the
9865 environment (that is, it is an
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9885 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9886 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9890 \begin_layout Enumerate
9891 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9894 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9897 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 arg "depth-decrement"
9907 to decrease the depth after the next
9910 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9919 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9924 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9927 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9941 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9946 reset the counter for the label.
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9960 arg "depth-decrement"
9963 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9964 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9965 into the twofold-nested
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9974 The same thing happens if we do another
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9989 \begin_layout Standard
9990 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9995 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10006 The number of other
10010 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10017 The same rule applies for the
10021 environment, as well.
10024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10025 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10028 \begin_layout Enumerate
10029 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10030 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10031 the same detail with how we did it.
10040 \begin_layout Standard
10048 arg "depth-increment"
10055 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10056 the example in parentheses someplace.
10057 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10058 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10059 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10063 \begin_layout Enumerate
10068 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10072 \begin_layout Verse
10073 Now we will add verse.
10074 \begin_inset Newline newline
10077 It will get much worse.
10078 \begin_inset Newline newline
10088 arg "depth-increment"
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10118 \begin_layout Verse
10119 Here comes a table:
10123 \begin_layout Standard
10124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10130 \begin_layout Standard
10132 \begin_inset Tabular
10133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 \begin_layout Verse
10225 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10235 arg "depth-increment"
10241 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10247 \begin_inset Newline newline
10255 arg "depth-decrement"
10262 \begin_layout Enumerate
10267 : level #1) This is another item.
10268 Note that selecting a
10272 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10273 3 times to put the table inside the
10281 \begin_layout Quotation
10282 We're now ending the
10286 list and changing to
10291 We're still at level #1.
10292 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10293 The next set of paragraphs is a
10294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10301 We will nest both the
10308 \begin_inset space ~
10313 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10317 for the letter body.
10321 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10324 to preserve the depth.
10325 Remember that you need to use
10328 arg "newline-insert newline"
10331 to create multiple lines inside the
10338 \begin_inset space ~
10348 \begin_layout Right Address
10350 \begin_inset Newline newline
10353 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10354 \begin_inset Newline newline
10360 \begin_layout Address
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10368 \begin_layout Quotation
10369 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10373 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10374 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10375 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10376 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10377 as soon as possible.
10378 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10381 \begin_layout Quotation
10382 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10383 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10384 with your order, along with payment.
10387 \begin_layout Quotation
10388 We thank you again for your patience.
10391 \begin_layout Address
10393 \begin_inset Newline newline
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 That ends that example!
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10406 gives you a lot of power with just
10408 We could have easily nested an
10429 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10432 \begin_layout Subsection
10434 \begin_inset Index idx
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10438 Nesting ! Separation
10444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10446 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10453 \begin_layout Standard
10454 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10456 For example you need two different enumerations:
10459 \begin_layout Enumerate
10464 \begin_layout Enumerate
10469 \begin_layout Enumerate
10473 \begin_layout Standard
10474 \begin_inset Separator plain
10480 \begin_layout Itemize
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10493 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10507 list item and use the menu
10509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10510 Start New Environment
10513 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10514 ) and behind it the new list.
10517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10518 Start New Parent Environment
10520 only appears if the item is nested.
10521 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10527 (red arrow in LyX).
10528 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10529 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10536 arg "paragraph-break"
10543 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10546 \begin_layout Section
10547 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10548 \begin_inset Index idx
10551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10562 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10564 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10565 be broken at the end of a line.
10566 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10570 \begin_layout Subsection
10572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10574 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10579 \begin_inset Index idx
10582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10591 \begin_layout Standard
10592 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10593 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10594 ) not to break the line at
10596 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10599 \begin_layout Quote
10600 Further documentation is given in section
10601 \begin_inset Newline newline
10605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10607 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10640 A protected space is set with
10642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10643 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10645 \begin_inset space ~
10653 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10659 \begin_layout Subsection
10661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10663 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10668 \begin_inset Index idx
10671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10672 Spacing ! Horizontal
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10688 The length units are listed in Appendix
10689 \begin_inset space ~
10693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10695 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10706 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10711 \begin_inset Index idx
10714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10715 Spaces ! Inter-word
10723 \begin_layout Standard
10724 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10725 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10726 at the ends of sentences.
10727 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10728 automatically takes care about this.
10729 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10730 followed by a period; see section
10731 \begin_inset space ~
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10737 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10742 To insert a normal space, select
10744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10745 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10747 \begin_inset space ~
10755 arg "space-insert normal"
10761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10765 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10770 \begin_inset Index idx
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10782 \begin_layout Standard
10784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10791 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10800 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10801 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10802 inside abbreviations:
10805 \begin_layout Quote
10807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10811 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10814 \begin_layout Standard
10815 or between values and units.
10816 Compare for example this:
10817 \begin_inset Newline newline
10821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10825 \begin_inset Newline newline
10828 10 kg (normal space
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10832 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10835 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10837 \begin_inset space ~
10845 arg "space-insert thin"
10851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can also insert the following space types:
10859 \begin_layout Description
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset space ~
10868 space A line with a
10869 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10873 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10880 negative thin space between the arrows.
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative medium space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative thick space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10953 \begin_inset space ~
10957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10960 em) space between the arrows.
10963 \begin_layout Description
10965 \begin_inset space ~
10969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10977 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 em) space between the arrows.
10995 \begin_layout Description
10997 \begin_inset space ~
11001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11009 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11017 \begin_inset space ~
11021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11024 em) space between the arrows.
11027 \begin_layout Description
11029 \begin_inset space ~
11033 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11037 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11042 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11049 cm space between the arrows.
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11054 \begin_inset space ~
11058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11060 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11064 lists the different space sizes.
11067 \begin_layout Standard
11068 \begin_inset Float table
11073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11074 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11079 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11083 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11093 \begin_inset Tabular
11094 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11095 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11097 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11213 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11372 \begin_inset Index idx
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11385 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11386 feature for adding extra space
11387 in a uniform fashion.
11388 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11389 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11390 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11391 equally between themselves.
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11398 \begin_layout Quote
11400 This is on the left side
11401 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11404 This is on the right
11407 \begin_layout Quote
11410 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11414 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_layout Standard
11438 That was an example in the
11444 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11455 is one in a standard paragraph.
11456 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11460 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11467 \begin_inset space ~
11472 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11477 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11489 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11560 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11562 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11563 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11567 option in the space dialog.
11575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11579 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11584 \begin_inset Index idx
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11596 \begin_layout Standard
11597 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11598 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11602 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11605 What is correct English?:
11606 \begin_inset Newline newline
11610 \begin_inset Newline newline
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11617 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11618 \begin_inset Newline newline
11622 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11648 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11654 \begin_layout Standard
11656 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11661 \begin_inset space ~
11665 \begin_inset space ~
11669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11673 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11676 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11680 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11706 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11707 That is why it is named
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11716 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11717 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11721 \begin_layout Subsection
11723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11725 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11730 \begin_inset Index idx
11733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11743 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11746 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11748 \begin_inset space ~
11754 There you find the following sizes:
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11770 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11771 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11776 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11787 \begin_inset Index idx
11790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11791 Document ! Settings
11796 for the paragraph separation.
11797 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11808 \begin_layout Standard
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11824 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11829 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11830 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11839 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 s are described in section
11849 \begin_inset space ~
11853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11855 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11864 If there are several
11868 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11869 You can therefore use
11873 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11881 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11888 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11895 \begin_layout Standard
11896 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11907 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11919 \begin_layout Subsection
11920 Paragraph Alignment
11921 \begin_inset Index idx
11924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11925 Paragraph ! Alignment
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11934 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11936 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11939 dialog (toolbar button
11942 arg "layout-paragraph"
11946 There are five possibilities:
11949 \begin_layout Itemize
11957 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11963 \begin_layout Itemize
11971 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11977 \begin_layout Itemize
11985 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11991 \begin_layout Itemize
11999 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12005 \begin_layout Itemize
12013 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12020 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12021 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12022 the left and right margins.
12023 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12026 \begin_layout Standard
12028 This paragraph is right aligned,
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 this one is centered,
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12038 this one is left aligned.
12041 \begin_layout Subsection
12043 \begin_inset Index idx
12046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12047 Page breaks ! Forced
12053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12055 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12063 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12064 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12065 force a page break where you want one.
12066 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12067 is good at page breaking.
12068 Only if you use a lot of
12072 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12073 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12076 \begin_layout Standard
12077 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12078 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12082 have to change the page breaking.
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12088 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12091 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12093 \begin_inset space ~
12099 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12102 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12104 \begin_inset space ~
12109 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12111 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12112 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12115 \begin_layout Standard
12116 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12117 at the top of a page.
12118 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12120 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12121 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12122 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12126 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12130 to learn more about
12137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12141 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12146 \begin_inset Index idx
12149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12150 Page breaks ! Clear
12158 \begin_layout Standard
12159 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12160 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12161 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12162 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12163 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12166 \begin_layout Standard
12167 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12170 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12172 \begin_inset space ~
12178 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12181 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12183 \begin_inset space ~
12187 \begin_inset space ~
12192 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12193 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12196 \begin_layout Subsection
12198 \begin_inset Index idx
12201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12210 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12217 \begin_layout Standard
12218 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12220 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12223 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12225 \begin_inset space ~
12229 \begin_inset space ~
12237 arg "newline-insert newline"
12241 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12244 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12258 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12261 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12263 This is useful to avoid
12264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12271 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12274 \begin_layout Standard
12275 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12276 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12278 very good at line breaking.
12279 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12280 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12281 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12287 reference "sec:Quote"
12292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12294 reference "sec:Verse"
12299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12301 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12308 \begin_layout Subsection
12310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12312 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12317 \begin_inset Index idx
12320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 \begin_layout Standard
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12342 \begin_layout Standard
12346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12347 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12354 you can insert horizontal lines.
12355 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12356 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12357 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12360 \begin_layout Standard
12362 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12373 \begin_layout Section
12374 Characters and Symbols
12377 \begin_layout Standard
12378 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12379 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12380 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12388 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12392 for information on how this is done.
12395 \begin_layout Standard
12396 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12401 dialog via the menu
12403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12404 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12419 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12420 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12422 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12430 \begin_layout Section
12431 Fonts and Text Styles
12432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12434 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12441 \begin_layout Subsection
12443 \begin_inset Index idx
12446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12456 There are two types of fonts:
12459 \begin_layout Description
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12474 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12479 characters) in the font.
12480 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12481 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12482 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12483 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12484 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12485 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12486 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12487 \begin_inset Newline newline
12490 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12491 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12492 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12493 sizes than at small ones.
12494 \begin_inset Newline newline
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12516 \begin_layout Description
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12522 \begin_inset Index idx
12525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12531 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12532 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12533 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12534 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12535 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12536 image manipulation program.
12537 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12538 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12539 \begin_inset space ~
12542 pixels high up to 34
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12546 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12547 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12548 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12550 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12551 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12552 \begin_inset Newline newline
12555 Bitmap fonts are named
12558 \begin_inset space ~
12563 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12566 \begin_layout Standard
12567 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12568 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12569 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12570 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12571 use scalable fonts.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12575 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12580 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12581 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12582 font to emphasize text, you use an
12583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12591 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12593 In \SpecialChar LyX
12594 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12598 \begin_layout Subsection
12601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12603 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12610 \begin_layout Standard
12611 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12612 used its own fonts.
12613 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12614 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12617 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12618 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12619 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12620 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12621 to a word processor.
12622 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12623 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 files are very portable across
12625 different machines.
12626 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12627 has increased a lot
12628 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12631 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12639 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12644 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 code in the document
12646 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12649 \begin_layout Standard
12650 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 engines that are also able directly
12652 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12654 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12656 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12658 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12659 that is installed on your system.
12660 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12663 \begin_layout Standard
12664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12672 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12673 es; so you might have to experiment.
12681 \begin_layout Subsection
12682 Document Font and Font size
12683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12685 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12690 \begin_inset Index idx
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12700 \begin_inset Index idx
12703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 You can set the document fonts in the
12715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12719 \begin_inset Index idx
12722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 Document ! Settings
12733 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12734 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12737 \begin_inset space ~
12746 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12748 \begin_inset space ~
12751 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12754 \begin_layout Standard
12759 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12760 This requires that you use
12772 as the output format, i.
12773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12777 \begin_inset space \space{}
12780 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12781 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12782 installed (see section
12783 \begin_inset space ~
12787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12789 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12794 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12796 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12797 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12802 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12803 cannot determine the family.
12804 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12805 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12808 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12811 \begin_layout Standard
12812 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12813 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12818 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12824 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12825 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12852 European Computer Modern
12855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12862 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12865 \begin_layout Standard
12874 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12875 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12888 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12894 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12895 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12898 \begin_layout Itemize
12902 \begin_inset space ~
12907 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12925 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12926 community in order to replace
12930 as the default font.
12931 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12932 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12935 \begin_inset space ~
12948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12949 One difference is improved kerning.
12957 \begin_layout Itemize
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12965 \begin_inset space ~
12970 fonts in (the rare) case that
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12978 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12993 Virtual means that it
12994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13005 -glyphs from other fonts.
13006 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13034 \begin_inset Index idx
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13039 -packages ! aeguill
13044 with the document preamble line
13045 \begin_inset Newline newline
13052 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13053 \begin_inset Newline newline
13058 will fix the guillemet problem.
13063 and that accented characters are not
13067 glyph, but built of
13071 characters, the accent and the letter.
13072 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13078 If you search for example for the French word
13079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13086 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13095 and not for the glyph
13096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13100 \begin_inset space ~
13104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13110 \begin_layout Itemize
13111 If you do not like the look of
13119 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13140 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13141 \begin_inset space ~
13144 serif and typewriter fonts,
13148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13149 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13156 \begin_inset space ~
13165 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13170 \begin_inset space \space{}
13178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13182 \begin_inset space \space{}
13188 \begin_inset space ~
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13206 but you can also select your own.
13207 \begin_inset Newline newline
13210 The differences between roman,
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13222 fonts are explained in section
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13229 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13234 \begin_inset Newline newline
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13245 was originally designed for newspapers.
13246 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13247 into the small newspaper columns.
13251 \begin_inset space ~
13256 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13259 \begin_layout Standard
13260 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13273 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13278 depends on the class you are using.
13279 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 Note that the font size is the
13288 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13289 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13290 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13291 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13300 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13307 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13314 \begin_layout Standard
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13323 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13328 serif or typewriter.
13333 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13343 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13346 \begin_layout Standard
13351 LaTeX font encoding
13353 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13354 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13360 \begin_inset Index idx
13363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 -packages ! fontenc
13371 \begin_inset space ~
13375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13377 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13382 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13383 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13390 \begin_layout Standard
13391 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13393 Use Old Style Figures
13397 Use True Small Caps
13400 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13403 Use Old Style Figures
13405 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13407 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13415 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13419 Use True Small Caps
13421 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13422 of scaled capitals.
13423 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13424 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13432 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13433 a font to display the script characters.
13437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13438 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13444 \begin_inset Index idx
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 So this has no effect for the document language
13468 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13472 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13480 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13485 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13486 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13488 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13490 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13493 dialog, see section
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13500 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13512 \begin_layout Subsection
13516 \begin_layout Standard
13517 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13518 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13520 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13521 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13522 choose a math font in the dialog
13524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13528 \begin_inset Index idx
13531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13532 Document ! Settings
13538 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13539 automatically selects a math font.
13540 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13550 \begin_inset space ~
13556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13561 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13562 document font is available.
13565 \begin_layout Standard
13566 Note that the math font will not be used for
13570 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13576 or by the insertion of the command
13583 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13584 \begin_inset space ~
13588 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13589 while the math characters do not.
13591 \begin_inset space ~
13594 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13610 in the document font settings.
13613 \begin_layout Standard
13614 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13615 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13616 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13617 font (in most cases
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13633 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13634 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13642 \begin_inset space ~
13648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13654 \begin_layout Subsection
13655 Using Different Character Styles
13656 \begin_inset Index idx
13659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13666 \begin_inset Index idx
13669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13678 \begin_layout Standard
13679 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13680 automatically changes the character style for certain
13681 paragraph environments.
13683 supports two character styles,
13692 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13696 \begin_layout Standard
13701 style, do one of the following:
13704 \begin_layout Itemize
13705 click on the toolbar button
13714 \begin_layout Itemize
13715 use the key binding
13724 \begin_layout Standard
13725 These commands are all toggles.
13730 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13733 \begin_layout Standard
13734 One typically uses the
13738 style for proper names.
13740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13747 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 A more widely used character style is the
13761 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13768 \begin_layout Itemize
13769 clicking on the toolbar button
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13779 using the keybindings
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13793 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13795 use a different font.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13799 We've been using the
13803 style all over the place in this document.
13804 Here's one more example:
13807 \begin_layout Quotation
13810 Do not overuse character styles!
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13815 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13816 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13817 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13830 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13832 \begin_inset space ~
13835 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13841 arg "dialog-show character"
13847 \begin_layout Subsection
13848 Fine-Tuning with the
13853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13855 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13860 \begin_inset Index idx
13863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13873 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13875 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13876 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13877 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13878 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13879 from ordinary dialog.
13882 \begin_layout Standard
13883 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13884 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13885 \begin_inset Newline newline
13888 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13889 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13892 \begin_layout Standard
13893 To use custom character styles, open the
13895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13897 \begin_inset space ~
13900 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13903 dialog or press the toolbar button
13906 arg "dialog-show character"
13910 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13911 font property that you can choose.
13912 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13915 \begin_inset space ~
13920 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13925 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13926 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13927 environments all at once.
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13931 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13934 \begin_inset space ~
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13961 The possible options are:
13965 \begin_layout Labeling
13966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Roman font family.
13972 Normally a serif font.
13973 It's also the default family.
13983 \begin_layout Labeling
13984 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13995 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 This is the Typewriter font family.
14021 arg "font-typewriter"
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14036 This corresponds to the print weight.
14041 \begin_layout Labeling
14042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14047 This is the Medium font series.
14048 It's also the default series.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This is the Bold font series.
14072 \begin_layout Labeling
14073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14078 As the name implies.
14083 \begin_layout Labeling
14084 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14089 This is the Upright font shape.
14090 It's also the default shape.
14093 \begin_layout Labeling
14094 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14108 s the Italic font shape
14114 \begin_layout Labeling
14115 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14122 This is the Slanted font shape
14124 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14125 , this is different from italic).
14128 \begin_layout Labeling
14129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14133 \begin_inset space ~
14140 This is the Small caps font shape
14147 \begin_layout Labeling
14148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14153 Alters the text color.
14154 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14163 , which means that the document default color set in
14165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14172 \begin_inset space ~
14177 is used, you can choose between
14254 \begin_inset Index idx
14257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14266 \begin_layout Labeling
14267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14272 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14273 the language of the document.
14274 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14275 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14277 \begin_inset Newline newline
14280 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14282 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14283 When using the spell checking (see section
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14290 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14294 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14297 \begin_layout Labeling
14298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14303 Alters the size of the font.
14304 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14305 proportional to the document font size.
14306 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14307 the details, but a general description of what
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14335 arg "font-size tiny"
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14369 \begin_layout Labeling
14370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14391 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14397 \begin_layout Labeling
14398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14419 arg "font-size small"
14425 \begin_layout Labeling
14426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 It's also the default size.
14444 arg "font-size normal"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 arg "font-size large"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size larger"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size largest"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 arg "font-size huge"
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14584 arg "font-size giant"
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14596 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14616 arg "font-size increase"
14622 \begin_layout Labeling
14623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14628 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14648 arg "font-size decrease"
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14660 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14661 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14663 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14664 — use those instead.
14665 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14668 \begin_layout Labeling
14669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14674 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14679 \begin_layout Labeling
14680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 This is text with emphasize on
14690 This might seem like the same as
14694 , but it is actually a bit different.
14700 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14702 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14705 \begin_layout Labeling
14706 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14713 This is text with Underbar on.
14719 arg "font-underline"
14725 \begin_inset Newline newline
14730 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14731 when you could not change fonts.
14732 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14733 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14734 because some people
14738 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14741 \begin_layout Labeling
14742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14746 \begin_inset space ~
14753 This is text with Double underbar on.
14759 arg "font-underunderline"
14763 \begin_inset Newline newline
14766 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14767 about double underbar.
14770 \begin_layout Labeling
14771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 \begin_inset space ~
14782 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14788 arg "font-underwave"
14792 \begin_inset Newline newline
14795 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14796 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14799 \begin_layout Labeling
14800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14807 This is text with Strikeout on.
14813 arg "font-strikeout"
14817 \begin_inset Newline newline
14820 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14821 changed in the meantime.
14824 \begin_layout Labeling
14825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 This is text with Noun on.
14839 , this is a logical attribute.
14840 Normally it's equivalent to
14843 \begin_inset space ~
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14854 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14856 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14858 \begin_inset space ~
14861 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 arg "dialog-show character"
14870 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14871 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14874 arg "textstyle-apply"
14878 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14882 \begin_layout Standard
14883 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14890 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14891 (suppose you just set the shape to
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset space ~
14922 \begin_layout Standard
14923 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14931 \begin_inset space ~
14943 \begin_layout Itemize
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 \begin_inset Newline newline
14978 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 \begin_inset Note Note
14995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14996 For more on phantoms see section
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15003 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15013 \begin_inset Newline newline
15019 \begin_layout Itemize
15024 fonts use characters with serifs.
15025 These are the small
15026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15033 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15034 The following example shows the difference:
15035 \begin_inset Newline newline
15039 \begin_inset Newline newline
15044 text without serifs
15047 \begin_inset Newline newline
15050 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15051 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15058 \begin_layout Itemize
15063 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15064 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15065 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15068 \begin_layout Standard
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15077 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15080 \begin_inset space ~
15085 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15086 the property to be removed.
15087 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15088 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15089 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15107 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15108 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15116 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15125 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15136 If you, for example, set
15137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15155 \begin_inset space ~
15160 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15169 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15172 \begin_layout Standard
15173 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15174 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15177 \begin_layout Section
15178 Printing and Previewing
15181 \begin_layout Subsection
15185 \begin_layout Standard
15186 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15187 using \SpecialChar LyX
15188 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15189 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15190 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15191 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15193 Additional Features
15198 \begin_layout Standard
15200 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15203 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15204 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15205 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15209 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15210 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15211 to turn your writing into printable output.
15212 This happens in two stages:
15215 \begin_layout Enumerate
15216 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15217 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15219 a file with the extension,
15220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15234 \begin_layout Enumerate
15235 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15236 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15237 to use the commands in the
15241 file to produce printable output.
15244 \begin_layout Subsection
15245 Output file formats
15246 \begin_inset Index idx
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15258 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15266 Simple text (ASCII)
15267 \begin_inset Index idx
15270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15271 File formats ! ASCII
15279 \begin_layout Standard
15280 This file type has the extension
15281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15293 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15297 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15305 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15307 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15308 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15316 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15317 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15318 bibliography (section
15319 \begin_inset space ~
15323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15325 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15330 If your document includes such material, use
15332 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 \begin_inset space ~
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15351 \begin_inset space ~
15355 \begin_inset space ~
15361 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15362 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15368 \begin_inset Index idx
15371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 This file type has the extension
15383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15394 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15397 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15398 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15399 -Errors or to process it manually
15400 with console commands.
15401 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15402 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15403 's temporary directory whenever you
15404 view or export your document.
15407 \begin_layout Standard
15408 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15409 -file using the menu
15411 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15412 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15416 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15417 export variants are explained in section
15418 \begin_inset space ~
15422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15424 reference "subsec:Export"
15431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15433 \begin_inset Index idx
15436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15445 \begin_layout Standard
15446 This file type has the extension
15447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15467 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15468 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15469 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15473 \begin_layout Standard
15474 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15475 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15476 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15477 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15478 when you view the DVI.
15479 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15482 \begin_layout Standard
15483 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15485 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15486 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15492 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15494 \begin_inset space ~
15500 The latter option uses the program
15502 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15511 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15512 font access (see section
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15519 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15525 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15536 File formats ! PostScript
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 This file type has the extension
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15558 PostScript was developed by the company
15562 as a printer language.
15563 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15565 PostScript can be seen as a
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15569 programming language
15570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15578 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15585 \begin_inset Index idx
15588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15590 -packages ! pstricks
15600 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15603 \begin_layout Standard
15604 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15608 Encapsulated PostScript
15609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15612 (EPS, file extension
15613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 As \SpecialChar LyX
15626 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15627 convert them in the background to EPS.
15628 If, for example, you have 50
15629 \begin_inset space ~
15632 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15634 \begin_inset space ~
15637 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15638 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15640 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15641 EPS to avoid this problem.
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15645 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15647 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15648 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15656 \begin_inset Index idx
15659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 \begin_inset Index idx
15669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15678 \begin_layout Standard
15679 This file type has the extension
15680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 Portable Document Format
15697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15704 was derived from PostScript.
15705 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15714 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15715 looks exactly the same.
15718 \begin_layout Standard
15719 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 (JPG, file extension
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 Portable Network Graphics
15756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15759 (PNG, file extension
15760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15772 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15773 converts them in the
15774 background to one of these formats.
15775 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15776 will slow down your workflow.
15777 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15781 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15789 \begin_layout Description
15791 \begin_inset space ~
15794 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15798 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15801 \begin_layout Description
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15810 ) This uses the program
15812 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15815 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15818 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15821 is a new engine, derived from
15825 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15826 access (see section
15827 \begin_inset space ~
15831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15833 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15838 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15839 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15844 \begin_layout Description
15846 \begin_inset space ~
15853 ) This uses the program
15858 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15864 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15865 font access (see section
15866 \begin_inset space ~
15870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15872 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15877 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15878 vertically written Japanese.
15881 \begin_layout Description
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15886 (cropped) This is the same as
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15894 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15895 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15896 to generate good-looking
15897 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15900 \begin_layout Description
15902 \begin_inset space ~
15905 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15909 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15913 \begin_layout Description
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15918 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15922 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15923 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15927 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15928 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15931 \begin_layout Standard
15935 \begin_inset space ~
15944 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15945 works without problems.
15946 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15947 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15959 \begin_inset space ~
15964 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15972 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15974 \begin_inset Index idx
15977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15978 FileFormats ! XHTML
15984 \begin_inset Index idx
15987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 This file type has the extension
15998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16011 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16012 When \SpecialChar LyX
16013 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16014 suitable for the purpose.
16015 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16021 between different formats, which are described in section
16023 Math Output in XHTML
16028 \begin_inset space ~
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16037 XHTML output remains
16038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16045 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16046 features are supported yet.
16050 and the World Wide Web
16054 Additional Features
16056 manual, for more information.
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16062 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16063 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16069 \begin_layout Subsection
16071 \begin_inset Index idx
16074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16083 \begin_layout Standard
16084 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16085 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16094 or use the toolbar button
16101 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16102 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16103 \begin_inset space ~
16107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16109 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16113 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16115 \begin_inset space ~
16119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16121 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16126 Further output formats can be selected via
16128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16129 View (Other Formats)
16131 or the toolbar button
16140 \begin_layout Standard
16141 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16142 viewer window using the menu
16144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16150 Update (Other Formats)
16155 \begin_layout Standard
16156 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16159 To have a real output, export your document.
16162 \begin_layout Section
16163 A few Words about Typography
16164 \begin_inset Index idx
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 \begin_layout Subsection
16177 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16178 \begin_inset Index idx
16181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 \begin_inset Index idx
16191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_layout Standard
16201 In \SpecialChar LyX
16203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16214 character comes in four lengths: the
16226 , and the minus sign:
16227 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16233 \begin_layout Standard
16234 \begin_inset Tabular
16235 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16236 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16237 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16238 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16239 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16240 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16269 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16309 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16336 \begin_inset space ~
16339 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16346 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16373 \begin_inset space ~
16376 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16397 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16431 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16437 \begin_layout Standard
16438 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16450 character multiple times in a row.
16451 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16452 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 \begin_layout Standard
16486 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16487 math mode and has a length of its own.
16488 Here are some examples:
16491 \begin_layout Enumerate
16492 line- and page-breaks
16493 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16503 \begin_layout Enumerate
16505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 Oh — there's a dash.
16517 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16527 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Subsection
16544 \begin_inset Index idx
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16556 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16565 but automatically in the output.
16566 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 \begin_inset Index idx
16575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16582 following the rules of the document language.
16585 \begin_layout Standard
16587 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16591 font and with unusual constructs, like
16592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16600 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16601 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16602 This is done with the menu
16604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16607 \begin_inset space ~
16613 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16615 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16619 \begin_layout Standard
16620 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16621 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16632 would then see the hyphen
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16640 as a hyphenation possibility.
16641 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16642 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16643 as described in section
16645 Prevent Hyphenation
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16658 \begin_layout Subsection
16660 \begin_inset Index idx
16663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16673 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16676 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16683 \begin_layout Standard
16684 When \SpecialChar LyX
16685 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16686 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16688 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16694 appropriate amount of space.
16695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16698 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16700 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16701 gets after another word.
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16705 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16706 not work in all cases.
16708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16719 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16720 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16723 \begin_layout Standard
16724 Here are some examples of
16728 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16731 \begin_layout Itemize
16736 \begin_layout Itemize
16741 \begin_layout Standard
16742 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16745 \begin_layout Itemize
16747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16751 this is too much space!
16754 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \begin_layout Standard
16760 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16763 \begin_layout Standard
16764 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16767 \begin_layout Enumerate
16771 \begin_inset space ~
16776 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16783 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16788 \begin_inset Index idx
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16792 Spaces ! inter-word
16800 \begin_layout Enumerate
16804 \begin_inset space ~
16809 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16816 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16821 \begin_inset Index idx
16824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16833 \begin_layout Enumerate
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16845 \begin_inset space ~
16852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16854 \begin_inset space ~
16859 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16860 This function is also bound to
16863 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16869 \begin_layout Standard
16870 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16873 \begin_layout Itemize
16875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16879 \begin_inset space \space{}
16882 this is too much space!
16885 \begin_layout Itemize
16886 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16890 \begin_layout Standard
16891 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16892 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16894 will take care of this.
16897 \begin_layout Standard
16898 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16902 \begin_inset space ~
16908 feature described in the section
16910 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16915 Additional Features
16920 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16922 \begin_inset Index idx
16925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16926 Typography ! Quotes
16932 \begin_inset Index idx
16935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16968 usually sets quotes correctly.
16969 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16970 and use a closing quote at the end.
16972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16980 The keyboard character,
16984 , generates this automatically.
16987 \begin_layout Standard
16988 You can specify what character the
16992 key produces using the submenu
16998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17002 \begin_inset Index idx
17005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 Document ! Settings
17016 There are six choices:
17019 \begin_layout Labeling
17020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 \begin_layout Labeling
17044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17047 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17051 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17057 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17061 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17067 \begin_layout Labeling
17068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17071 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17081 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17085 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17091 \begin_layout Labeling
17092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17095 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17099 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17105 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17109 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17115 \begin_layout Labeling
17116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17119 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17123 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17129 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17133 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17139 \begin_layout Labeling
17140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17143 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17147 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17153 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17157 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17163 \begin_layout Standard
17164 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17167 arg "quote-insert single"
17173 \begin_layout Subsection
17175 \begin_inset Index idx
17178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17179 Typography ! Ligatures
17185 \begin_inset Index idx
17188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17219 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17226 \begin_layout Standard
17227 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17228 print them as single characters.
17229 These groups are known as
17234 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17235 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17237 Here are the standard ligatures:
17240 \begin_layout Itemize
17244 \begin_layout Itemize
17248 \begin_layout Itemize
17252 \begin_layout Itemize
17256 \begin_layout Itemize
17260 \begin_layout Standard
17261 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17264 \begin_layout Standard
17265 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17266 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17274 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17290 To break a ligature, use
17292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17293 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17295 \begin_inset space ~
17302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17330 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17338 \begin_layout Subsection
17340 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17342 \begin_inset Index idx
17345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17355 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17362 \begin_layout Standard
17365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17366 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17370 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17373 \begin_layout Description
17375 The name of the game.
17378 \begin_layout Description
17380 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17384 \begin_layout Description
17386 The \SpecialChar TeX
17387 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17391 \begin_layout Description
17392 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17393 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17397 \begin_layout Standard
17398 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17404 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17412 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17413 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17414 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17415 converges to the number
17416 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17419 : The actual version is
17420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17428 , the previous one was
17429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17440 \begin_layout Subsection
17442 \begin_inset Index idx
17445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17454 \begin_layout Standard
17455 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17456 space between two words.
17457 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17467 for units use the menu
17469 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17470 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17480 arg "space-insert thin"
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 Here is an example to show the differences:
17490 \begin_layout Standard
17491 \begin_inset Tabular
17492 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17493 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17494 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17495 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17502 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17518 space between number and unit
17525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17534 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17546 half space between number and unit
17559 \begin_layout Subsection
17561 \begin_inset Index idx
17564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17565 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17573 \begin_layout Standard
17574 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17576 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17577 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17578 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17579 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17580 These bits of text became known as
17591 \begin_layout Standard
17592 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17593 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17594 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17595 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17596 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17597 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17598 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17599 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17600 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17609 \begin_inset Newline newline
17617 \begin_inset Newline newline
17620 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17621 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17622 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17628 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17630 key "latexcompanion"
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17645 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17646 's page break mechanism.
17649 \begin_layout Chapter
17650 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17653 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17660 \begin_layout Standard
17661 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17664 \begin_inset space ~
17670 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17673 \begin_layout Section
17675 \begin_inset Index idx
17678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17694 \begin_layout Standard
17696 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17699 \begin_layout Description
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17705 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17706 \begin_inset Newline newline
17710 \begin_inset Note Note
17713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17714 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17722 \begin_layout Description
17723 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17724 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17725 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17728 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17729 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17731 \begin_inset space ~
17737 \begin_inset Newline newline
17741 \begin_inset Note Comment
17744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17745 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17754 \begin_layout Description
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17759 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17760 set in the document settings under
17762 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17770 \begin_inset Newline newline
17774 \begin_inset Newline newline
17778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17787 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17788 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17793 of a comment that appears in the output.
17799 \begin_inset Newline newline
17803 \begin_inset Newline newline
17806 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17809 \begin_layout Standard
17810 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17818 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17822 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17825 \begin_layout Section
17827 \begin_inset Index idx
17830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17839 name "sec:Footnotes"
17846 \begin_layout Standard
17848 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17854 or the toolbar button
17857 arg "footnote-insert"
17869 \begin_inset Graphics
17870 filename clipart/footnote.png
17879 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17880 's representation of your footnote.
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17909 label, the box will
17913 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17914 Clicking on the box label again will close
17927 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17928 and click on the footnote
17943 \begin_layout Standard
17944 Here is an example footnote:
17952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17953 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17963 position where the footnote box is placed.
17964 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17965 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17966 according to the document class.
17968 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17969 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17975 ey are described in the
17978 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_layout Section
17988 \begin_inset Index idx
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18000 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18007 \begin_layout Standard
18008 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18010 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18019 or the toolbar button
18022 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18048 appearing within your text.
18049 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18050 's representation of your margin
18059 \begin_layout Standard
18060 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18064 \begin_inset Marginal
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 This is a marginal note.
18077 \begin_layout Standard
18078 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18079 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18080 pages, right on odd pages.
18083 \begin_layout Standard
18084 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18087 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18103 \begin_layout Section
18104 Graphics and Images
18105 \begin_inset Index idx
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18115 \begin_inset Index idx
18118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18127 name "sec:Graphics"
18134 \begin_layout Standard
18135 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18136 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18139 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18148 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18151 \begin_layout Standard
18152 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18157 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18158 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18160 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18161 \begin_inset space ~
18165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18167 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18174 \begin_layout Standard
18179 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18180 of the image in the output.
18181 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18185 \begin_inset space ~
18189 \begin_inset space ~
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18202 \begin_inset space ~
18206 \begin_inset space ~
18211 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18212 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18220 \begin_layout Standard
18224 \begin_inset space ~
18228 \begin_inset space ~
18233 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18234 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18236 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18241 \begin_inset space ~
18246 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18247 with the image size is printed.
18250 \begin_layout Standard
18251 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18252 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18254 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18257 \begin_layout Standard
18259 \begin_inset Graphics
18260 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18268 \begin_layout Standard
18269 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18270 the image into a float, see section
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18277 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18284 \begin_layout Subsection
18286 \begin_inset Index idx
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18298 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18305 \begin_layout Standard
18306 You can insert images in any known file format.
18307 But as we explained in section
18308 \begin_inset space ~
18312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18314 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18318 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18320 therefore uses the program
18324 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18325 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18326 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18333 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18340 \begin_layout Standard
18341 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18344 \begin_layout Description
18346 \begin_inset space ~
18349 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18350 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18351 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 Graphics Interchange Format
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 (GIF, file extension
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18372 \begin_inset Index idx
18375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18407 Portable Network Graphics
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18411 (PNG, file extension
18412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18424 \begin_inset Index idx
18427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18459 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18463 (JPG, file extension
18464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18488 \begin_inset Index idx
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18522 \begin_layout Description
18524 \begin_inset space ~
18527 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18529 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18530 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18531 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18532 \begin_inset Newline newline
18535 Scalable image formats can be
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18539 Scalable Vector Graphics
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 (SVG, file extension
18544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18556 \begin_inset Index idx
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18591 Encapsulated PostScript
18592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18595 (EPS, file extension
18596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18608 \begin_inset Index idx
18611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18643 Portable Document Format
18644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18647 (PDF, file extension
18648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18660 \begin_inset Index idx
18663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18678 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18679 result will not be scalable.
18680 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18686 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18694 \begin_layout Standard
18695 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18702 \begin_layout Subsection
18703 Grouping of Image Settings
18704 \begin_inset Index idx
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18708 Images ! Settings grouping
18716 \begin_layout Standard
18717 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18719 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18720 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18722 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18723 need to manually change each of them.
18727 \begin_layout Standard
18728 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset space ~
18747 \begin_inset space ~
18751 \begin_inset space ~
18757 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18758 and checking the name of the desired group.
18761 \begin_layout Section
18763 \begin_inset Index idx
18766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18782 \begin_layout Standard
18783 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18786 arg "tabular-insert"
18791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18795 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18796 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18797 from the rest of the table.
18798 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18799 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18801 Here is an example table:
18804 \begin_layout Standard
18806 \begin_inset Tabular
18807 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18808 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18810 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18812 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19012 \begin_layout Subsection
19016 \begin_layout Standard
19017 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19020 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19024 This brings up the table dialog.
19025 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19026 cursor is placed currently.
19027 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19028 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19029 done on all of your selection.
19032 \begin_layout Standard
19033 In addition to the table dialog, the
19036 \begin_inset space ~
19041 helps you in setting table properties.
19042 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19045 \begin_layout Standard
19049 \begin_inset space ~
19054 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19055 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19056 current cell respectively.
19057 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19059 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19060 of text, see section
19061 \begin_inset space ~
19065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19067 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19074 \begin_layout Standard
19075 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19076 using the check box
19085 This will merge the cells to
19089 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19090 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19091 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19092 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19093 in the last row without the upper border:
19096 \begin_layout Standard
19098 \begin_inset Tabular
19099 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19100 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19102 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19104 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19200 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19235 \begin_layout Standard
19236 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19237 -arguments for the table.
19238 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19239 explained in the chapter
19246 \begin_inset space ~
19252 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19253 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19254 but are visible in the output.
19257 \begin_layout Standard
19258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19266 Most DVI-viewers are
19270 able to display rotations.
19278 \begin_layout Standard
19283 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19288 adds lines for all cell borders.
19291 \begin_layout Subsection
19293 \begin_inset Index idx
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 Tables ! Multi-page
19303 \begin_inset Index idx
19306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 \begin_layout Standard
19316 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19319 \begin_inset space ~
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19331 \begin_inset space ~
19336 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19337 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19340 \begin_layout Description
19345 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19346 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19347 except for the first page, if
19350 \begin_inset space ~
19358 \begin_layout Description
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19367 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19368 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19371 \begin_layout Description
19376 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19377 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19378 except for the last page, if
19381 \begin_inset space ~
19389 \begin_layout Description
19393 \begin_inset space ~
19398 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19399 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19402 \begin_layout Description
19403 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19404 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19410 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19413 \begin_inset space ~
19421 \begin_layout Standard
19422 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19423 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19424 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19430 In this context, first means first in this order:
19433 \begin_inset space ~
19445 \begin_inset space ~
19450 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19453 \begin_layout Standard
19455 \begin_inset Tabular
19456 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19457 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19458 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19459 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19460 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19461 <row endfirsthead="true">
19462 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19473 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19482 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19492 <row endfirsthead="true">
19493 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19513 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <row endhead="true">
19526 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19556 <row endhead="true">
19557 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <row endfoot="true">
19590 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <row endlastfoot="true">
21572 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 \begin_layout Subsection
21611 \begin_inset Index idx
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21623 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21630 \begin_layout Standard
21631 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21632 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21633 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21634 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21638 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21641 \begin_layout Standard
21642 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21643 for the column in the table dialog.
21644 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21645 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21649 \begin_layout Standard
21651 \begin_inset Tabular
21652 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21653 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21654 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21655 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21656 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 This is longer now.
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21858 This is longer now.
21863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 \begin_layout Standard
21890 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21891 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21897 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21903 Selection with the mouse or with
21907 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21908 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21909 the selection from outside the table.
21912 \begin_layout Section
21914 \begin_inset Index idx
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21933 \begin_layout Subsection
21937 \begin_layout Standard
21938 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21939 have a fixed location.
21941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21948 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21956 \begin_inset space ~
21961 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21962 too many notes on the current page.
21965 \begin_layout Standard
21966 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21967 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21968 and pages without text.
21969 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21970 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21971 Floats are therefore numbered.
21972 Referencing is described in section
21973 \begin_inset space ~
21977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21979 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21986 \begin_layout Standard
21987 To insert a float, use the menu
21989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21993 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21994 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21996 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21997 \begin_inset Index idx
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22006 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22007 paragraph within the float.
22008 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22009 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22010 left-clicking on the box label.
22011 A closed float box looks like this:
22012 \begin_inset Graphics
22013 filename clipart/float.png
22018 – a gray button with a red label.
22021 \begin_layout Standard
22022 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22024 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22027 \begin_layout Subsection
22029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22031 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22036 \begin_inset Index idx
22039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 Floats ! Figure floats
22048 \begin_layout Standard
22050 \begin_inset space ~
22054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22056 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22060 was created using the menu
22062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22063 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22069 arg "float-insert figure"
22073 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22082 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22086 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22087 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22089 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22091 \begin_inset space ~
22099 arg "layout-paragraph"
22105 \begin_layout Standard
22106 \begin_inset Float figure
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22113 \begin_inset Graphics
22114 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22129 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22133 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22146 \begin_layout Standard
22147 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22148 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22159 ) and refer to it using the menu
22161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22167 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22171 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22172 vague references like
22173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22180 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22181 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22191 For more about cross-references, see section
22192 \begin_inset space ~
22196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22198 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22205 \begin_layout Standard
22206 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22207 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22208 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22209 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22210 as described in section
22211 \begin_inset space ~
22215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22217 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22223 \begin_inset space ~
22227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22229 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22233 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22234 You can also set the images one below the other.
22236 \begin_inset space ~
22240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22242 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22249 reference "fig:Platypus"
22253 are the subfigures.
22256 \begin_layout Standard
22257 \begin_inset Float figure
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22267 \begin_inset Float figure
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22278 name "fig:Undefinable"
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 \begin_inset Graphics
22292 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22303 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22307 \begin_inset Float figure
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22318 name "fig:Platypus"
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 \begin_inset Graphics
22332 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22344 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22356 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22360 Two distorted images.
22373 \begin_layout Subsection
22375 \begin_inset Index idx
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 Floats ! Table floats
22387 \begin_layout Standard
22388 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22391 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22394 or the toolbar button
22397 arg "float-insert table"
22401 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22402 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22403 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22405 \begin_inset space ~
22409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22411 reference "tab:Table-float"
22418 \begin_layout Standard
22419 \begin_inset Float table
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22430 name "tab:Table-float"
22442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 \begin_inset Tabular
22445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22446 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22447 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22448 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22449 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22600 \end{array}\right]$
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22642 \begin_layout Subsection
22644 \begin_inset Index idx
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22656 \begin_layout Standard
22658 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22659 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22660 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22662 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22670 \begin_inset space ~
22678 \begin_layout Section
22680 \begin_inset Index idx
22683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 \begin_layout Standard
22694 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22696 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22697 \begin_inset space \space{}
22704 \begin_layout Standard
22705 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22706 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22712 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22713 and its alignment within the page.
22716 \begin_layout Standard
22718 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22728 height_special "totalheight"
22733 backgroundcolor "none"
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 This is a minipage.
22740 The text is set in an italic style.
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22747 another formatting.
22755 \begin_layout Standard
22756 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22759 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22763 as described in section
22764 \begin_inset space ~
22768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22770 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22775 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22781 \begin_layout Standard
22782 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22792 height_special "totalheight"
22797 backgroundcolor "none"
22800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22802 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22808 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22812 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22822 height_special "totalheight"
22827 backgroundcolor "none"
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22831 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22832 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22840 \begin_layout Standard
22841 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22848 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22850 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22857 \begin_inset space ~
22865 \begin_layout Chapter
22866 Mathematical Formulas
22867 \begin_inset Index idx
22870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_inset Index idx
22880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22911 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22918 \begin_layout Standard
22919 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22924 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22927 \begin_layout Section
22929 \begin_inset Index idx
22932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22941 \begin_layout Standard
22942 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22955 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22957 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22958 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22959 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22967 \begin_layout Standard
22968 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22972 \begin_inset space ~
22977 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22980 \begin_layout Standard
22981 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22982 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22986 This is a line with an inline formula
22987 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22993 \begin_layout Standard
22994 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22995 paragraph, like this one:
22996 \begin_inset Formula
23003 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23006 \begin_layout Standard
23008 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23010 For example, typing
23011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23024 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23025 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23029 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23032 \begin_inset space ~
23040 \begin_layout Subsection
23041 Navigating in Formulas
23042 \begin_inset Index idx
23045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23054 \begin_layout Standard
23055 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23056 achieved with the arrow keys.
23058 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23059 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23064 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23065 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23069 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23073 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23076 \end{array}\right]$
23084 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23089 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23090 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23093 \begin_layout Standard
23098 , printed in this document as
23099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23103 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23110 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23111 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23112 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23117 For example, if you want
23118 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23126 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23136 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23140 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23145 , since in the latter case only the
23148 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23153 will be under the square root sign:
23154 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23160 \begin_layout Standard
23161 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23163 \begin_inset Formula
23165 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23174 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23175 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23178 \begin_layout Subsection
23182 \begin_layout Standard
23183 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23184 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23188 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23189 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23190 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23191 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23192 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23196 \begin_layout Subsection
23197 Exponents and Subscripts
23198 \begin_inset Index idx
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 \begin_inset Index idx
23211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 \begin_layout Standard
23221 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23224 arg "math-superscript"
23230 arg "math-subscript"
23233 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23235 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23238 , type in a formula
23241 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23251 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23257 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23261 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23267 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23273 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23282 , you have to use an extra
23286 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23287 For example, if you want
23288 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23294 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23300 Subscripts are similar: To get
23301 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23307 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23315 \begin_layout Subsection
23317 \begin_inset Index idx
23320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 \begin_layout Standard
23330 Create a fraction either with the command
23336 or by using the icon
23339 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23345 \begin_inset space ~
23351 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23352 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23353 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23358 To move back up, press
23363 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23364 \begin_inset Formula
23366 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23369 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23377 \begin_layout Subsection
23379 \begin_inset Index idx
23382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23391 \begin_layout Standard
23392 Roots can be created using the
23395 \begin_inset space ~
23403 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23409 arg "math-insert \\root"
23431 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23437 always produces a square root.
23440 \begin_layout Subsection
23441 Operators with Limits
23442 \begin_inset Index idx
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 \begin_inset Index idx
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23464 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23471 \begin_layout Standard
23473 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23477 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23480 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23481 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23482 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23483 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23484 The sum operator will automatically place its
23485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23492 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23494 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23498 \begin_inset Formula
23500 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23505 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23509 \begin_layout Standard
23510 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23512 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23513 behind the operator and using the menu
23515 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23516 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23518 \begin_inset space ~
23522 \begin_inset space ~
23536 \begin_layout Standard
23537 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23546 \begin_inset Index idx
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 \begin_inset Formula
23558 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23563 which will place the
23564 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23576 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23577 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23583 \begin_layout Standard
23584 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23591 Have a look at section
23592 \begin_inset space ~
23596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23598 reference "subsec:Functions"
23602 for an explanation of function macros.
23605 \begin_layout Subsection
23607 \begin_inset Index idx
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 \begin_layout Standard
23620 Most math symbols can be found in the
23623 \begin_inset space ~
23628 under one of several categories; including
23645 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23649 \begin_layout Standard
23650 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23651 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23652 don't have to use the
23655 \begin_inset space ~
23660 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23662 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23665 \begin_layout Subsection
23667 \begin_inset Index idx
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 \begin_layout Standard
23680 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23686 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23692 \begin_inset space ~
23700 arg "math-insert \\space"
23704 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23705 For example, the sequence
23710 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23713 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23715 \begin_inset Graphics
23716 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23721 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23722 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23723 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23724 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23725 , because they are negative
23727 Here are two examples:
23730 \begin_layout Standard
23740 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23746 \begin_layout Standard
23756 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23762 \begin_layout Subsection
23764 \begin_inset Index idx
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23776 name "subsec:Functions"
23783 \begin_layout Standard
23787 \begin_inset space ~
23792 contains under the button
23795 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23798 a number of function macros, such as
23799 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23803 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23811 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23818 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23819 avoid confusions, because
23820 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23824 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23830 \begin_layout Standard
23831 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23833 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23837 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23843 \begin_layout Standard
23844 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23845 are placed, as described in section
23846 \begin_inset space ~
23850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23852 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23859 \begin_layout Subsection
23861 \begin_inset Index idx
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 \begin_layout Standard
23874 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23876 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23877 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23878 commands, for example, to enter
23879 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23882 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23883 Our example is entered by typing
23888 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23895 \begin_inset space ~
23899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23901 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23905 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23908 \begin_layout Standard
23909 \begin_inset Float table
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23920 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23924 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 \begin_inset Tabular
23935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24185 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24239 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24401 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24500 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24521 \begin_layout Standard
24522 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24525 \begin_inset space ~
24533 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24536 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24540 \begin_layout Section
24541 Brackets and Delimiters
24542 \begin_inset Index idx
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 \begin_inset Index idx
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24564 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24571 \begin_layout Standard
24572 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24574 For some purposes, using just the keys
24579 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24580 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24581 toolbar delimiter icon
24584 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24588 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24589 \begin_inset Formula
24591 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24599 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24600 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24604 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24607 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24613 \begin_inset Formula
24615 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24623 \begin_layout Standard
24624 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24625 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24630 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24631 left side and right side.
24632 If you use the option
24635 \begin_inset space ~
24640 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24641 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24643 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24648 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24649 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24654 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24655 is to go inside the brackets.
24656 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24661 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24662 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24663 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24667 arg "math-delim ( )"
24673 \begin_layout Section
24674 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24675 \begin_inset Index idx
24678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 \begin_inset Index idx
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24695 \begin_inset Index idx
24698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24707 \begin_layout Standard
24708 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24712 \begin_inset space ~
24720 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24724 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24725 Here is an example:
24726 \begin_inset Formula
24728 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24737 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24738 \begin_inset space ~
24742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24744 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24749 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24750 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24751 This alignment is set in the box
24756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24805 for every column as default.
24806 For example, the sequence
24807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24818 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24819 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24820 corresponds to the relevant column.
24821 The result will look like this:
24822 \begin_inset Formula
24825 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24826 column & has & has\,right\\
24827 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24837 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24840 arg "newline-insert newline"
24843 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24844 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24846 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24849 or the math toolbar.
24852 \begin_layout Standard
24853 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24854 It can be created with the menu
24856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24857 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24859 \begin_inset space ~
24871 Here is an example:
24872 \begin_inset Formula
24886 \begin_layout Standard
24887 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24890 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24893 arg "newline-insert newline"
24897 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24902 arg "newline-insert newline"
24905 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24913 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24914 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24915 A new row is created by every further entry of
24918 arg "newline-insert newline"
24922 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24923 Here is an example:
24924 \begin_inset Formula
24926 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24927 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24932 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24933 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24934 \begin_inset Formula
24936 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24944 \begin_layout Standard
24945 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24952 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24953 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24956 reference "eq:asquared"
24961 The other types are described in section
24962 \begin_inset space ~
24966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24968 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24975 \begin_layout Section
24976 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24977 \begin_inset Index idx
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24981 Math ! Formula numbering
24987 \begin_inset Index idx
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24991 Math ! Referencing formulas
24997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24999 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25006 \begin_layout Standard
25007 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25009 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25010 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25012 \begin_inset space ~
25016 \begin_inset space ~
25024 arg "math-number-toggle"
25028 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25029 within parentheses.
25030 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25031 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25032 the document class.
25033 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25034 separated by a dot:
25035 \begin_inset Formula
25045 arg "math-number-toggle"
25048 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25049 You can only number displayed formulas.
25052 \begin_layout Standard
25053 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25055 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25056 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25058 \begin_inset space ~
25062 \begin_inset space ~
25070 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25073 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25074 \begin_inset Formula
25077 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25083 To number all lines use the shortcut
25086 arg "math-number-toggle"
25092 \begin_layout Standard
25093 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25096 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25097 A label is inserted with the menu
25099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25108 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25109 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25110 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25122 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25123 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25124 We inserted in the following example the label
25125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25132 in the second line:
25133 \begin_inset Formula
25135 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25136 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25141 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25142 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25143 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25147 \begin_inset space ~
25155 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25159 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25160 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25161 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25162 as the formula number:
25165 \begin_layout Standard
25166 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25169 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25176 \begin_layout Standard
25177 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25178 's cross-reference box are described in section
25179 \begin_inset space ~
25183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25185 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25190 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25198 \begin_layout Section
25199 User defined math macros
25200 \begin_inset Index idx
25203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 \begin_layout Standard
25214 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25215 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25216 Math macros are explained in section
25219 \begin_inset space ~
25231 \begin_layout Section
25235 \begin_layout Subsection
25237 \begin_inset Index idx
25240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 \begin_layout Standard
25250 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25251 To set a font in a formula, use the
25254 \begin_inset space ~
25262 arg "math-insert \\font"
25265 , or enter its command, listed in table
25266 \begin_inset space ~
25270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25272 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25279 \begin_layout Standard
25280 \begin_inset Float table
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25291 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25295 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 \begin_inset Tabular
25306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25307 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25341 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25368 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25395 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25455 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25543 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25577 \begin_layout Standard
25578 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25602 \begin_layout Standard
25603 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25604 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25609 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25610 space when you need a space in the box.
25611 Here is an example where
25612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25623 denotes the set of numbers:
25624 \begin_inset Formula
25626 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25634 \begin_layout Standard
25635 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25636 You can, for example, put a character in
25645 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25649 \begin_inset Newline newline
25652 So it is better not to use this feature.
25655 \begin_layout Standard
25656 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25657 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25661 \begin_inset Newline newline
25664 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25670 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25671 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25677 \begin_layout Standard
25684 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25687 \begin_layout Standard
25688 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25690 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25691 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25693 \begin_inset space ~
25701 \begin_layout Subsection
25703 \begin_inset Index idx
25706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25715 \begin_layout Standard
25716 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25718 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25722 \begin_inset space ~
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25734 \begin_inset space ~
25742 arg "math-insert \\font"
25746 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25747 in black instead of blue.
25748 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25749 Here is an example:
25750 \begin_inset Formula
25753 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25754 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25763 \begin_layout Subsection
25765 \begin_inset Index idx
25768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25777 \begin_layout Standard
25778 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25779 automatically chosen in most situations.
25797 For most characters,
25805 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25806 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25811 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25812 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25813 thinks are appropriate.
25814 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25817 arg "math-insert \\style"
25821 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25822 For example, you can set
25823 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25826 , which is normally in
25835 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25839 The four styles are used in the following example:
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25843 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25847 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25851 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25855 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25861 \begin_layout Standard
25862 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25863 is set in a particular size with the menu
25865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25867 \begin_inset space ~
25872 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25873 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25874 will be adjusted to correspond.
25875 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25886 \begin_layout Standard
25890 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25896 \begin_layout Section
25897 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25899 \begin_inset Index idx
25902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25909 \begin_inset Index idx
25912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 \begin_layout Standard
25923 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25924 that are in common use.
25927 \begin_layout Subsection
25928 Enabling AMS-Support
25931 \begin_layout Standard
25932 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25933 the document by selecting the checkbox
25936 \begin_inset space ~
25940 \begin_inset space ~
25944 \begin_inset space ~
25951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25955 \begin_inset Index idx
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25959 Document ! Settings
25967 \begin_inset space ~
25973 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25974 -errors in formulas,
25975 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25978 \begin_layout Subsection
25980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25982 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25987 \begin_inset Index idx
25990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25991 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25999 \begin_layout Standard
26000 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26001 provides a selection of different formula types.
26003 allows you to choose between
26024 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26031 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26034 \begin_layout Chapter
26038 \begin_layout Section
26040 \begin_inset Index idx
26043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26052 name "sec:Cross-References"
26059 \begin_layout Standard
26060 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26061 's strengths is cross-references.
26062 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26064 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26065 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26066 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26069 \begin_layout Enumerate
26073 \begin_layout Enumerate
26074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26076 name "enu:Second-item"
26083 \begin_layout Enumerate
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26093 or by pressing the toolbar button
26100 A gray label box like this:
26101 \begin_inset Graphics
26102 filename clipart/label.png
26107 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26109 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26144 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26145 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26161 \begin_layout Standard
26162 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26164 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26167 or the toolbar button
26170 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26174 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26175 \begin_inset Graphics
26176 filename clipart/reference.png
26181 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26183 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26196 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26200 \begin_layout Standard
26201 As an alternative to
26203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26206 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26211 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26212 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26214 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26226 \begin_layout Standard
26227 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26228 \begin_inset space ~
26232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26234 reference "enu:Second-item"
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26242 It is recommended to use a protected space
26246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26247 described in section
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26254 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26263 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26264 line breaks between them.
26267 \begin_layout Standard
26268 There are six formats of cross-references:
26271 \begin_layout Description
26272 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26275 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26282 \begin_layout Description
26283 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26284 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26296 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26303 \begin_layout Description
26304 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26305 \begin_inset space ~
26309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26310 LatexCommand pageref
26311 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26318 \begin_layout Description
26320 \begin_inset space ~
26324 \begin_inset space ~
26327 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26329 LatexCommand vpageref
26330 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26335 \begin_inset Newline newline
26338 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26339 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26340 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26341 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26342 it prints “on the next page”.
26343 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26346 \begin_layout Description
26348 \begin_inset space ~
26352 \begin_inset space ~
26356 \begin_inset space ~
26359 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26362 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26367 \begin_inset Newline newline
26370 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26376 ; otherwise it behaves like
26380 \begin_inset space ~
26384 \begin_inset space ~
26393 \begin_layout Description
26395 \begin_inset space ~
26398 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26399 \begin_inset Newline newline
26403 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26411 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26421 \begin_inset Index idx
26424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26426 -packages ! prettyref
26432 \begin_inset Index idx
26435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26437 -packages ! refstyle
26448 \begin_inset Newline newline
26451 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26452 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26455 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26459 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26460 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26468 is the default and preferred because
26472 supports only English documents.
26473 The format is specified by using the command
26485 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26486 preamble of the document.
26487 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26500 ) can be done with this command
26501 \begin_inset Newline newline
26508 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26513 \begin_inset Newline newline
26516 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26518 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26520 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26527 \begin_layout Description
26529 \begin_inset space ~
26532 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26534 LatexCommand nameref
26535 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26542 \begin_layout Standard
26543 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26544 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26546 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26550 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26555 You can only use the style
26559 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26563 is always possible.
26566 \begin_layout Standard
26567 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26568 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26570 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26571 \begin_inset space ~
26575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26577 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26584 \begin_layout Standard
26585 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26589 \begin_inset space ~
26593 \begin_inset space ~
26598 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26599 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26602 \begin_inset space ~
26607 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26608 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26611 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26617 \begin_layout Standard
26618 You can change labels at any time.
26619 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26620 do not need to think about this.
26623 \begin_layout Standard
26624 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26626 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26630 \begin_layout Standard
26631 References are described in detail in the section
26632 \begin_inset space ~
26642 \begin_inset space ~
26650 \begin_layout Section
26651 Table of Contents and other Listings
26652 \begin_inset Index idx
26655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26662 \begin_inset Index idx
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26666 Navigating ! Outline
26672 \begin_inset Index idx
26675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26691 \begin_layout Subsection
26693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26695 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26702 \begin_layout Standard
26703 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26706 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26708 \begin_inset space ~
26712 \begin_inset space ~
26718 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26720 If you click on it, the
26724 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26725 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26726 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26728 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26730 \begin_inset space ~
26735 that is described in section
26736 \begin_inset space ~
26740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26742 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26749 \begin_layout Standard
26750 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26751 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26753 \begin_inset space ~
26757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26759 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26763 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26765 \begin_inset space ~
26769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26771 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26775 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26777 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26780 \begin_layout Subsection
26781 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26784 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26791 \begin_layout Standard
26792 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26794 You can insert them via the
26796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26800 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26803 \begin_layout Section
26804 URLs and Hyperlinks
26805 \begin_inset Index idx
26808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26815 \begin_inset Index idx
26818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26827 \begin_layout Subsection
26829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26838 \begin_layout Standard
26839 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26841 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26847 \begin_layout Standard
26848 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26850 \begin_inset Flex URL
26853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26863 \begin_layout Standard
26864 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26870 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26874 \begin_layout Standard
26875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26883 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26892 \begin_layout Subsection
26894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26896 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26903 \begin_layout Standard
26904 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26909 or with the toolbar button
26916 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26925 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26926 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26929 name "LyX's homepage"
26930 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26934 , an Email address like this:
26935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26937 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26938 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26943 , or a link to a file.
26946 \begin_layout Standard
26947 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26960 to the link target.
26963 \begin_layout Standard
26964 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26965 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26966 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26967 the text style dialog.
26968 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26972 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26974 name "LyX's homepage"
26975 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26982 \begin_layout Standard
26983 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26987 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26989 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26990 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26994 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26996 \begin_inset Newline newline
27004 \begin_inset Newline newline
27011 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27014 \begin_layout Section
27016 \begin_inset Index idx
27019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27028 name "sec:Appendices"
27035 \begin_layout Standard
27036 Appendices are created with the menu
27038 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27040 \begin_inset space ~
27044 \begin_inset space ~
27050 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27051 as the appendix part of the book.
27052 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27055 \begin_layout Standard
27056 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27057 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27058 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27059 and the subsection number.
27060 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27064 \begin_layout Standard
27066 \begin_inset space ~
27070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27072 reference "chap:Credits"
27077 \begin_inset space ~
27081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27083 reference "subsec:Export"
27090 \begin_layout Section
27092 \begin_inset Index idx
27095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27104 name "sec:Bibliography"
27111 \begin_layout Standard
27112 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27114 You can include a bibliography database,
27118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27119 Known under the name
27120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27123 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27133 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27134 manually, using the paragraph environment
27138 , which was described in section
27139 \begin_inset space ~
27143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27145 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27150 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27151 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27155 use a bibliography database.
27158 \begin_layout Subsection
27159 The Bibliography Environment
27162 \begin_layout Standard
27167 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27169 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27178 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27180 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27190 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27193 \begin_layout Standard
27194 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27199 or the toolbar button
27202 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27206 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27207 containing the available citations.
27208 Select one or more keys from the list and
27218 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27219 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27223 \begin_layout Standard
27224 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27225 entry with surrounding brackets.
27230 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27231 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27247 Companion Second Edition
27250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27252 key "latexcompanion"
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27260 The \SpecialChar LyX
27261 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27262 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27272 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27275 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27277 \begin_inset space ~
27285 arg "layout-paragraph"
27289 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27292 \begin_layout Subsection
27293 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27295 \begin_inset Index idx
27298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27299 Bibliography ! Databases
27305 \begin_inset Index idx
27308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27309 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27318 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27325 \begin_layout Standard
27326 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27334 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27335 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27340 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27342 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27343 your working field in a database.
27344 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27345 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27346 list for that document.
27347 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27351 \begin_layout Standard
27352 The database is a text file with the file extension
27353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27364 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27365 The format is explained in
27366 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27372 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27376 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27381 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27382 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27383 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27385 \begin_inset Flex URL
27388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27390 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27398 \begin_layout Standard
27399 To use a database, use the menu
27401 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27406 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27408 \begin_inset space ~
27414 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27415 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27422 Add bibliography to TOC
27424 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27429 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27430 in the document or just the cited references.
27433 \begin_layout Standard
27434 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27446 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27447 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27448 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27449 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27451 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27457 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27458 \begin_inset Newline newline
27462 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27464 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27476 \begin_layout Standard
27477 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27480 \begin_layout Standard
27481 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27482 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27484 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27492 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27498 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27499 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27503 The following variants are possible:
27506 \begin_layout Description
27507 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27508 with other bibliography packages (e.
27509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27513 \begin_inset space \space{}
27520 ), only with the package
27524 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27528 \begin_layout Description
27529 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27530 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27531 with all bibliography packages, except
27536 \begin_layout Description
27537 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27542 , works with all bibliography packages
27545 \begin_layout Standard
27546 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27547 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27549 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27552 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27556 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27565 \begin_layout Standard
27566 When you select the option
27568 Sectioned bibliography
27572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27573 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27576 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27577 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27579 Customizing Bibliographies
27583 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27588 Additional Features
27593 \begin_layout Standard
27594 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27595 the two methods of creating them.
27596 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27597 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27598 We used the style file
27602 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27605 \begin_layout Subsection
27607 \begin_inset Index idx
27610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 Bibliography ! Citation format
27619 \begin_layout Standard
27620 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27621 For this feature you need to enable the option
27627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27631 \begin_inset Index idx
27634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27635 Document ! Settings
27645 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27646 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27647 style files as explained in
27648 the previous section.
27651 \begin_layout Standard
27652 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27653 the citation reference window.
27654 Here is an example where the text
27655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27659 \begin_inset space ~
27663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27666 appears after the reference:
27669 \begin_layout Standard
27671 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27674 key "latexcompanion"
27681 \begin_layout Section
27683 \begin_inset Index idx
27686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27702 \begin_layout Standard
27703 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27707 \begin_inset space ~
27712 or the toolbar button
27719 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27720 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27721 by \SpecialChar LyX
27722 as the index entry.
27725 \begin_layout Standard
27726 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27728 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27729 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27731 \begin_inset space ~
27737 A light blue box labeled
27738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27749 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27750 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27754 \begin_layout Standard
27755 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27756 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27757 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27758 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27762 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27769 \begin_layout Subsection
27770 Grouping Index Entries
27771 \begin_inset Index idx
27774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27784 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27786 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27787 lists under the entry
27788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27796 First we create the entry
27797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27805 \begin_inset space ~
27809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27811 reference "subsec:Lists"
27816 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27817 \begin_inset space ~
27821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27823 reference "sec:Itemize"
27827 , we insert the command
27830 \begin_layout Standard
27836 \begin_layout Standard
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27846 \begin_layout Standard
27847 for the enumerated list in section
27848 \begin_inset space ~
27852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27854 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27861 \begin_layout Standard
27862 The exclamation mark
27863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27870 marks the grouping levels.
27871 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27872 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27873 If we don't have an index entry for
27874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27881 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27884 \begin_layout Subsection
27886 \begin_inset Index idx
27889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27890 Index ! Page ranges
27898 \begin_layout Standard
27899 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27901 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27902 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27903 an index entry in section
27904 \begin_inset space ~
27908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27910 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27917 \begin_layout Standard
27920 Paragraph environments|(
27923 \begin_layout Standard
27924 and another entry at the end of section
27925 \begin_inset space ~
27929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27931 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27938 \begin_layout Standard
27941 Paragraph environments|)
27944 \begin_layout Standard
27946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27969 respectively start and end the index range.
27970 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27971 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27972 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27973 An example is the index entry
27974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27977 Document ! Settings
27978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27984 \begin_layout Subsection
27986 \begin_inset Index idx
27989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27990 Index ! Cross referencing
27998 \begin_layout Standard
27999 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28000 We referred for example in the index entry
28001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28009 \begin_inset space ~
28013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28015 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28019 ) to the index entry
28020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28027 in the same section using the entry
28030 \begin_layout Standard
28033 GIF|see{Image formats}
28036 \begin_layout Standard
28037 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28039 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28040 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28043 \begin_layout Subsection
28045 \begin_inset Index idx
28048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28049 Index ! Entry order
28057 \begin_layout Standard
28058 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28059 follow the rules for the index order.
28060 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28066 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28068 \begin_inset space ~
28072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28074 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28083 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28084 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28109 \begin_inset Index idx
28112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 Dummy entries ! maïs
28119 \begin_inset Index idx
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 Dummy entries ! maître
28129 \begin_inset Index idx
28132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28133 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28138 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28139 maïs, maison, maître.
28140 To achieve this, we use the command
28143 \begin_layout Standard
28146 previous entry@current entry
28149 \begin_layout Standard
28150 In our case we want to have
28151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28166 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28169 \begin_layout Standard
28175 \begin_layout Standard
28176 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28177 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28179 See the next subsection for an example.
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28183 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28189 \begin_layout Standard
28190 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28195 to generate the index (see section
28196 \begin_inset space ~
28200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28202 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28211 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28212 -package aeguill in section
28213 \begin_inset space ~
28217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28219 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28223 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28224 -packages although all these index
28225 commands start with
28226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28239 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28244 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28247 \begin_layout Standard
28259 \begin_layout Standard
28271 \begin_layout Subsection
28273 \begin_inset Index idx
28276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28277 Index ! Entry layout
28285 \begin_layout Standard
28286 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28287 \begin_inset Index idx
28290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28293 This is an italic dummy entry
28298 You can also format the page number using the character
28299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28306 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28307 -command without a backslash.
28308 We can write for example
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28314 italic page number:|textit
28317 \begin_layout Standard
28318 to get the page number in italic.
28319 \begin_inset Index idx
28322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28323 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28328 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28329 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28347 \begin_inset space ~
28353 Have a look at section
28354 \begin_inset space ~
28358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28360 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28364 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28368 \begin_layout Standard
28369 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28377 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28381 to generate the index, see section
28382 \begin_inset space ~
28386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28388 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28397 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28402 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28403 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28406 key "latexcompanion"
28418 \begin_layout Standard
28419 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28421 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28422 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28423 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28424 If so, put the following in the preamble
28427 \begin_layout Standard
28439 \begin_layout Standard
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28449 \begin_layout Standard
28450 in the index entry.
28451 \begin_inset Index idx
28454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28455 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28460 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28461 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28462 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28465 \begin_layout Standard
28466 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28467 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28468 a bold font for all index entries.
28469 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28481 documentation for details,
28482 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28484 key "makeindex,xindy"
28491 \begin_layout Subsection
28493 \begin_inset Index idx
28496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28505 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28512 \begin_layout Standard
28513 If the index generation program
28517 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28518 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28522 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28523 distribution, is used.
28527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28532 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28533 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28534 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28535 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28536 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28546 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28548 dialog, see section
28549 \begin_inset space ~
28553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28555 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28560 The available options are listed and explained in
28561 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28563 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28568 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28572 \begin_layout Standard
28573 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28574 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28578 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28582 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28583 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28586 \begin_layout Subsection
28590 \begin_layout Standard
28591 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28592 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28600 next to the standard index.
28602 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28603 that add this feature.
28610 \begin_inset Index idx
28613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28615 -packages ! splitidx
28620 package to generate multiple indexes.
28621 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28627 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28629 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28636 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28637 style, but it also includes
28638 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28639 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28647 \begin_layout Standard
28648 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28649 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28651 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28652 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28655 and select the option
28657 Use multiple Indexes
28664 already contains the standard index
28665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28673 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28674 also appear as a heading) to the
28678 input field and press the
28683 The new index now also appears in the list.
28684 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28685 label color to the new index.
28688 \begin_layout Standard
28689 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28699 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28700 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28701 are additional features:
28704 \begin_layout Itemize
28705 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28706 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28709 \begin_layout Itemize
28710 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28711 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28719 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28720 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28721 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28722 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28725 \begin_layout Section
28726 Nomenclature/Glossary
28727 \begin_inset Index idx
28730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28737 \begin_inset Index idx
28740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28771 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28778 \begin_layout Standard
28779 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28780 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28781 called nomenclature or glossary.
28784 \begin_layout Standard
28785 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28792 \begin_inset Index idx
28795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 -packages ! nomencl
28803 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28805 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28811 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28815 \begin_layout Standard
28816 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28817 and then use the menu
28819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28825 \begin_inset space ~
28830 or the toolbar button
28833 arg "nomencl-insert"
28838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28849 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28852 \begin_layout Standard
28853 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28854 The first is the term or
28858 that you wish to define.
28863 of the term or symbol.
28866 \begin_layout Standard
28867 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28875 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28876 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28884 \begin_layout Subsection
28885 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28886 \begin_inset Index idx
28889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28890 Nomenclature ! Layout
28898 \begin_layout Standard
28899 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28903 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28910 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28918 \begin_inset Newline newline
28926 \begin_inset Newline newline
28932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28939 character starts/ends the formula.
28940 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28941 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28953 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28963 \begin_layout Standard
28964 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28965 -syntax is given in section
28966 \begin_inset space ~
28970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28972 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28979 \begin_layout Standard
28983 \begin_inset space ~
28988 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28990 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28995 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29002 in this document is:
29003 \begin_inset Newline newline
29008 dummy entry for the character
29013 \begin_inset Newline newline
29025 \begin_inset space ~
29035 font use the command
29064 \begin_layout Standard
29065 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29070 \begin_inset space \space{}
29074 \begin_inset Newline newline
29090 \begin_inset Newline newline
29093 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29094 This command will make the font of all symbols
29101 \begin_inset space ~
29109 \begin_layout Standard
29110 If the characters |
29111 \begin_inset space \space{}
29115 \begin_inset space \space{}
29119 \begin_inset space \space{}
29123 \begin_inset space \space{}
29127 \begin_inset space \space{}
29130 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29131 a quote character in front of them.
29132 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29133 LatexCommand nomenclature
29134 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29135 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29142 \begin_layout Subsection
29143 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29144 \begin_inset Index idx
29147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29148 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29156 \begin_layout Standard
29157 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29158 -code of the symbol
29160 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29162 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29165 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29166 LatexCommand nomenclature
29168 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29175 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29179 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29180 LatexCommand nomenclature
29183 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29188 They will be sorted by
29189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29215 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29218 will be sorted before the
29222 since the character
29223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29230 is considered in sorting.
29233 \begin_layout Standard
29234 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29237 \begin_inset space ~
29242 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29243 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29245 For the example given, you can insert
29249 in this field for the
29250 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29257 will be located before
29258 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29264 \begin_layout Standard
29265 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29270 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29279 \begin_layout Subsection
29280 Nomenclature Options
29281 \begin_inset Index idx
29284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29285 Nomenclature ! Options
29293 \begin_layout Standard
29298 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29299 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29302 \begin_layout Description
29303 refeq Appends the phrase
29304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29319 to every nomenclature entry, where
29325 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29328 \begin_layout Description
29329 refpage Appends the phrase
29330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29345 to every nomenclature entry, where
29351 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29354 \begin_layout Description
29355 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29358 \begin_layout Standard
29359 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29360 class options list in the
29362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29366 In this document the options
29373 \begin_layout Standard
29374 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29380 \begin_layout Standard
29381 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29382 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29387 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29390 \begin_layout Description
29400 \begin_layout Description
29403 nomrefpage Like the
29410 \begin_layout Description
29413 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29422 \begin_layout Description
29426 \begin_inset space ~
29432 \begin_inset space ~
29437 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29440 \begin_layout Standard
29442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29449 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29450 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29462 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29465 \begin_inset Newline newline
29472 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29477 \begin_inset Newline newline
29481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29496 by their translation.
29499 \begin_layout Subsection
29500 Printing the Nomenclature
29501 \begin_inset Index idx
29504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29505 Nomenclature ! Printing
29513 \begin_layout Standard
29514 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29517 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29533 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29534 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29535 You can choose between these settings:
29538 \begin_layout Description
29539 Default a space of 1
29540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29546 \begin_layout Description
29548 \begin_inset space ~
29552 \begin_inset space ~
29555 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29558 \begin_layout Description
29559 Custom custom space
29562 \begin_layout Standard
29563 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29572 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29580 For example, in order to change the name to
29584 , add the following line to the preamble:
29587 \begin_layout Standard
29595 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29598 \begin_layout Subsection
29599 Nomenclature Program
29600 \begin_inset Index idx
29603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29604 Nomenclature ! Program
29610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29612 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29619 \begin_layout Standard
29625 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29626 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29628 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29633 by adding options, see section
29634 \begin_inset space ~
29638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29640 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29645 The available options are listed and explained in
29646 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29648 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29655 \begin_layout Section
29657 \begin_inset Index idx
29660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29667 \begin_inset Index idx
29670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29671 Document ! Branches
29677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29679 name "sec:Branches"
29686 \begin_layout Standard
29687 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29688 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29689 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29690 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29693 \begin_layout Standard
29694 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29695 allows you to put text into branches.
29696 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29697 To create a branch, either select the menu
29699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29700 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29703 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29712 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29713 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29714 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29715 and whether the name of the branch should
29716 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29717 (see below for an example).
29718 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29719 to the name of the other) and to add
29720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29732 \begin_inset space ~
29735 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29736 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29739 \begin_layout Standard
29740 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29741 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29746 where you can choose a branch.
29747 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29752 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29753 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29756 \begin_layout Standard
29757 \begin_inset Branch Question
29760 \begin_layout Standard
29761 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29769 \begin_layout Standard
29770 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29773 \begin_layout Standard
29774 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29782 \begin_layout Standard
29789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29793 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29794 Consider for example a file
29795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29802 which has the above branches.
29804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29811 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29835 branch were inactive,
29836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29851 branch was active, likewise
29852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29867 branch was active, and
29868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29871 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29875 if both branches were active.
29876 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29879 \begin_layout Standard
29880 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29886 \begin_layout Standard
29887 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29888 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29889 definitions for each branch.
29890 For example you can define for the question branch
29894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29895 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29896 -syntax, see section
29897 \begin_inset space ~
29901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29903 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29915 \begin_layout Standard
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29935 \begin_layout Standard
29936 and for the answer branch
29939 \begin_layout Standard
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29959 \begin_layout Standard
29960 \begin_inset Branch Question
29963 \begin_layout Standard
29967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29999 \begin_layout Standard
30003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30031 \begin_layout Standard
30032 Now it is possible to use the
30036 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30043 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30046 commands to obtain conditional output.
30047 Here is an example formula where only the
30054 \begin_inset Formula
30056 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30064 \begin_layout Standard
30065 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30073 \begin_layout Standard
30074 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30080 \begin_inset space \space{}
30083 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30085 For this advanced usage, see the
30091 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30096 \begin_layout Section
30098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30100 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30105 \begin_inset Index idx
30108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30117 \begin_layout Standard
30120 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30121 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30124 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30126 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30132 \begin_inset Index idx
30135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30137 -packages ! hyperref
30142 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30143 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30144 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30145 part of the document.
30149 \begin_layout Standard
30150 The header information in the dialog tab
30154 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30155 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30156 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30157 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30161 \begin_inset space ~
30165 \begin_inset space ~
30170 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30171 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30172 and author entries.
30176 \begin_inset space ~
30180 \begin_inset space ~
30184 \begin_inset space ~
30189 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30192 \begin_layout Standard
30193 You can specify in the dialog tab
30197 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30202 \begin_inset space ~
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30210 \begin_inset space ~
30215 option allows long links to be split;
30218 \begin_inset space ~
30222 \begin_inset space ~
30226 \begin_inset space ~
30234 \begin_inset space ~
30239 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30242 \begin_inset space ~
30247 colors the different links.
30248 The default colors are:
30251 \begin_layout Labeling
30252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30257 for hyperlinks and URLs
30260 \begin_layout Labeling
30261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30269 \begin_layout Labeling
30270 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30278 \begin_layout Standard
30279 but you can change these in the field
30284 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30290 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30293 \begin_layout Standard
30298 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30299 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30300 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30303 \begin_layout Standard
30308 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30309 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30310 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30320 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30321 when opening the PDF.
30323 \begin_inset space ~
30326 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30327 \begin_inset space ~
30330 1 will only display the sections.
30333 \begin_layout Standard
30334 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30335 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30341 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30342 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30351 \begin_layout Section
30353 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30357 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30364 \begin_layout Subsection
30367 \begin_inset Index idx
30370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30380 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30387 \begin_layout Standard
30388 As \SpecialChar LyX
30389 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30390 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30391 commands and constructs,
30394 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30395 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30396 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30397 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30398 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30399 cannot support all packages and
30403 \begin_layout Standard
30404 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30405 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30406 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30410 Code box is created by the menu
30412 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30414 \begin_inset space ~
30419 or by the toolbar button
30432 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30441 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30443 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30445 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30446 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30453 , you can write the command part
30459 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30460 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30464 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30465 Code box behind the word.
30466 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30467 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30471 \begin_layout Standard
30472 \begin_inset Graphics
30473 filename clipart/ERT.png
30481 \begin_layout Standard
30485 \begin_layout Standard
30486 This is a line with a
30490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30514 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30522 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30523 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30524 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30525 know that the command is finished.
30533 \begin_layout Subsection
30534 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30536 \begin_inset Argument 1
30539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30540 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30547 \begin_inset Index idx
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30560 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30567 \begin_layout Standard
30568 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30569 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30570 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30571 uses in the background.
30572 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30573 is based on commands, you can
30574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30582 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30583 any time if you know the right commands.
30584 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30585 is the end of the day.
30586 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30587 all caption labels bold.
30588 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30590 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30594 \begin_layout Standard
30595 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30597 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30599 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30602 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30611 \begin_layout Standard
30612 As result you find that the package
30617 \begin_inset Index idx
30620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30622 -packages ! caption
30628 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30630 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30633 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30637 \begin_inset space ~
30645 \begin_layout Standard
30650 usepackage[options]{package name}
30653 \begin_layout Standard
30654 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30655 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30656 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30657 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30660 \begin_layout Standard
30661 In your case the package name is
30666 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30671 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30672 So you add the command
30675 \begin_layout Standard
30680 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30683 \begin_layout Standard
30684 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30689 For more commands provided by the
30693 package, have a look at its documentation,
30694 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30708 \begin_layout Standard
30709 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30711 For example if you use a
30715 class, you don't need the package
30719 , you can instead write
30722 \begin_layout Standard
30727 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30732 \begin_layout Standard
30733 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30734 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30735 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30742 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30745 \begin_layout Standard
30746 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30747 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30749 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30750 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30751 Code box as described in the previous
30755 \begin_layout Standard
30756 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30757 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30762 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30769 \begin_layout Standard
30770 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30776 \begin_layout Standard
30780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30790 \begin_inset Note Note
30793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30794 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30802 \begin_layout Left Header
30803 \begin_inset Argument 1
30806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30826 \begin_inset Note Note
30829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30830 defines the header line as described below
30838 \begin_layout Center Header
30839 \begin_inset Argument 1
30842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30851 \begin_layout Right Header
30852 \begin_inset Argument 1
30855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30876 \begin_layout Left Footer
30877 \begin_inset Argument 1
30880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30901 \begin_layout Center Footer
30902 \begin_inset Argument 1
30905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30917 \begin_inset Newline newline
30921 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30927 \begin_layout Right Footer
30928 \begin_inset Argument 1
30931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30953 \begin_layout Section
30954 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30957 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30962 \begin_inset Index idx
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30966 Document ! Header/Footer line
30972 \begin_inset Index idx
30975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 \begin_layout Standard
30985 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30989 \begin_inset space ~
31000 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31006 \begin_inset space ~
31012 As a second step add in the menu
31014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31022 Custom Header/Footerlines
31023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31027 This module offers the following 6
31028 \begin_inset space ~
31034 \begin_layout Description
31036 \begin_inset space ~
31040 \begin_inset space ~
31044 \begin_inset space ~
31048 \begin_inset space ~
31052 \begin_inset space ~
31058 \begin_layout Description
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31068 \begin_inset space ~
31072 \begin_inset space ~
31076 \begin_inset space ~
31082 \begin_layout Standard
31083 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31087 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31088 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31090 \begin_inset space ~
31094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31096 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31100 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31103 \begin_layout Standard
31104 \begin_inset Float figure
31110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 \begin_inset Tabular
31114 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31115 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31116 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31117 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31118 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31120 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31138 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31149 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31167 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31182 The normal text on the page goes here.
31183 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31185 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31186 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31191 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31200 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31211 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31229 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31240 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31258 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31276 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31281 name "fig:Page-layout"
31285 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31299 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31307 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31311 \begin_inset space ~
31316 is set to “Default”.
31317 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31326 \begin_layout Subsection
31330 \begin_layout Standard
31331 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31332 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31333 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31334 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31336 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31337 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31340 \begin_layout Standard
31341 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31342 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31348 \begin_inset space ~
31356 \begin_layout Description
31359 thepage prints the current page number
31362 \begin_layout Description
31365 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31368 \begin_layout Description
31371 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31374 \begin_layout Description
31377 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31378 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31385 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31388 because it usually goes in a left header.
31391 \begin_layout Description
31394 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31395 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31397 It is normally used in the right header.
31400 \begin_layout Subsection
31401 Default header/footer
31404 \begin_layout Standard
31405 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31406 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31407 footer has the page number.
31408 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31409 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31410 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31413 \begin_inset space ~
31421 \begin_layout Subsection
31425 \begin_layout Standard
31426 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31427 Some pages are different.
31428 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31429 a new part or chapter in your book.
31430 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31431 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31432 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31436 Header and footer decoration line
31439 \begin_layout Standard
31440 By default, you get a 0.4
31441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31444 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31445 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31457 in the following way:
31460 \begin_layout Standard
31467 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31470 \begin_layout Standard
31471 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31480 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31487 \begin_layout Standard
31488 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31490 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31491 \begin_inset space ~
31495 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31505 Several header/footer lines
31508 \begin_layout Standard
31509 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31510 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31511 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31513 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31528 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31529 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31531 \begin_inset space ~
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31546 headheight}{height}
31549 \begin_layout Standard
31550 where height is a size in standard units.
31551 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31552 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31553 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31554 logfile with the menu
31556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31562 \begin_inset space ~
31567 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31572 \begin_inset Index idx
31575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31577 -packages ! fancyhdr
31583 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31584 for your header/footer.
31587 \begin_layout Subsection
31591 \begin_layout Standard
31592 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31593 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31594 This example consists of the following definition:
31597 \begin_layout Description
31599 \begin_inset space ~
31608 , empty optional argument
31611 \begin_layout Description
31613 \begin_inset space ~
31616 Header empty, empty optional argument
31619 \begin_layout Description
31621 \begin_inset space ~
31630 in the optional argument
31633 \begin_layout Description
31635 \begin_inset space ~
31644 in the optional argument
31647 \begin_layout Description
31649 \begin_inset space ~
31662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31666 \begin_inset Newline newline
31670 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31677 in the optional argument
31680 \begin_layout Description
31682 \begin_inset space ~
31691 , empty optional argument
31694 \begin_layout Description
31697 headrulewidth set to 2
31698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31704 \begin_layout Standard
31705 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31706 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31712 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31721 \begin_layout Standard
31722 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31728 \begin_layout Standard
31732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31736 pagestyle{headings}
31742 \begin_inset Note Note
31745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31746 switches back to page style with the default headings
31754 \begin_layout Section
31755 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31758 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31763 \begin_inset Index idx
31766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31773 \begin_inset Index idx
31776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31785 \begin_layout Standard
31787 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31788 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31789 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31792 \begin_layout Subsection
31796 \begin_layout Standard
31797 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31803 \begin_inset Index idx
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31808 -packages ! preview-latex
31813 (on some systems named simply
31818 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31820 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31826 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31828 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31836 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31837 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31838 -package are automatically
31839 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31843 \begin_layout Subsection
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31848 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31849 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31851 activate the option
31854 \begin_inset space ~
31861 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31867 \begin_inset space ~
31871 \begin_inset space ~
31874 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31881 \begin_inset space ~
31894 \begin_inset space ~
31899 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31902 \begin_layout Standard
31903 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31916 \begin_inset space ~
31924 \begin_layout Standard
31925 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31926 and when you finish
31930 \begin_layout Standard
31931 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31939 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31940 generated by activating the option
31943 \begin_inset space ~
31949 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31957 \begin_layout Subsection
31958 Selected document parts
31961 \begin_layout Standard
31962 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31963 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31964 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31965 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31967 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31969 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31973 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31974 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31975 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31978 \begin_layout Standard
31979 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31986 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31998 is explained in section
32000 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32005 \begin_inset space ~
32015 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32016 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32017 the final rotated boxes,
32018 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32019 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32021 Here is the result:
32024 \begin_layout Standard
32025 \begin_inset Preview
32027 \begin_layout Standard
32032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32036 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32042 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32052 height_special "totalheight"
32057 backgroundcolor "none"
32060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32085 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32091 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32113 \begin_layout Standard
32114 Previewing works also for colors.
32115 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32134 is explained in section
32141 \begin_inset space ~
32154 \begin_layout Standard
32155 \begin_inset Preview
32157 \begin_layout Standard
32161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32180 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32185 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32204 \begin_layout Standard
32205 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32211 \begin_layout Standard
32212 If \SpecialChar LyX
32213 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32214 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32215 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32216 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32217 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32218 the \SpecialChar TeX
32220 If \SpecialChar LyX
32221 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32222 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32224 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32225 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32226 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32229 \begin_layout Subsection
32234 \begin_layout Standard
32235 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32236 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32239 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32241 \begin_inset space ~
32246 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32248 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32250 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32251 's main window, then only this selection
32252 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32253 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32254 the source view window.
32259 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32260 ; but note that if you have
32261 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32263 not just the one which is open at the time.
32266 \begin_layout Section
32267 Advanced Find and Replace
32268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32270 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32275 \begin_inset Index idx
32278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32285 \begin_inset Index idx
32288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32297 \begin_layout Subsection
32301 \begin_layout Standard
32302 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32303 allows for searching of complex,
32304 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32306 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32307 The key-features are:
32310 \begin_layout Itemize
32311 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32312 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32313 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32317 \begin_layout Itemize
32318 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32319 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32320 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32321 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32324 \begin_layout Itemize
32325 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32326 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32327 outside of mathematics environments
32330 \begin_layout Itemize
32331 Search may be widened to a specific
32336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32340 \begin_inset space ~
32343 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32344 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32351 \begin_layout Itemize
32352 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32353 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32358 \begin_inset space ~
32361 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32364 \begin_layout Subsection
32368 \begin_layout Standard
32369 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32371 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32384 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32387 ) or the toolbar button
32390 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32396 Advanced Find and Replace
32401 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32405 \begin_layout Standard
32411 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32415 \begin_inset space ~
32420 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32423 arg "paragraph-break"
32427 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32428 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32432 arg "paragraph-break"
32435 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32439 searches backwards.
32442 \begin_layout Standard
32446 \begin_inset space ~
32451 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32460 \begin_inset space ~
32465 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32469 Searching for mathematics
32472 \begin_layout Standard
32473 Mathematical formulas, such as
32474 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32477 or something more complex like
32478 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32481 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32486 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32487 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32488 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32489 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32499 \begin_layout Standard
32500 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32501 This is done by switching to the
32505 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32510 This way, entering in the
32517 \begin_layout Itemize
32518 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32519 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32522 \begin_layout Itemize
32523 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32524 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32527 \begin_layout Itemize
32528 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32529 of it only within section headings.
32530 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32531 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32535 \begin_layout Itemize
32536 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32537 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32540 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32545 The entries made in the
32549 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32552 \begin_inset space ~
32558 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32562 button or alternatively press
32565 arg "paragraph-break"
32572 while the cursor is in the
32575 \begin_inset space ~
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32584 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32586 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32590 \begin_layout Itemize
32591 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32592 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32600 with its typewriter version
32601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32615 \begin_layout Itemize
32616 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32622 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32634 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32641 (you may want to enable the
32644 \begin_inset space ~
32652 \begin_inset space ~
32657 options and disable the
32665 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32673 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32674 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32678 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32681 , or occurrences of
32682 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32686 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32692 \begin_layout Subsection
32696 \begin_layout Standard
32697 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32702 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32704 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32706 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32715 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32721 This is done with the context menu
32723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32724 Insert Regular Expression
32726 while the cursor is in the
32731 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32732 expression matching rules
32736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32737 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32744 \begin_inset space ~
32747 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32748 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32754 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32755 same text in the document.
32756 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32757 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32760 \begin_layout Enumerate
32761 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32766 editor the fraction
32767 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32771 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32774 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32775 fractions with the given denominator.
32778 \begin_layout Enumerate
32779 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32791 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32796 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32797 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32798 Also, by inserting a
32799 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32802 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32803 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32806 \begin_layout Standard
32807 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32808 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32809 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32812 , and referring back to them through
32813 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32817 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32821 For example, try searching with the regexp
32822 \begin_inset Newline newline
32825 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32828 \begin_inset Newline newline
32831 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32834 \begin_layout Standard
32835 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32838 \begin_layout Standard
32839 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32847 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32848 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32849 sub-expressions is absolute.
32851 \begin_inset space ~
32855 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32858 always refers to the first occurrence of
32859 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32862 in all entered regexps.
32870 \begin_layout Section
32872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32874 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32879 \begin_inset Index idx
32882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32891 \begin_layout Standard
32893 has a built-in spell checker.
32896 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32903 key or the toolbar button
32906 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32909 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32910 beginning of the currently selected text.
32911 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32912 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32913 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32914 scrolled so that it is visible.
32915 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32916 n, if any could be found.
32917 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32921 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32922 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32925 \begin_layout Standard
32926 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32933 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32934 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32936 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32937 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32940 \begin_inset space ~
32948 arg "dialog-show character"
32951 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32953 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32956 \begin_layout Standard
32957 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32958 can be downloaded from here:
32959 \begin_inset Newline newline
32963 \begin_inset Flex URL
32966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32968 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32974 \begin_inset Newline newline
32978 \begin_inset space ~
32981 files for each language.
32982 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32983 \begin_inset space ~
32986 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32987 's installation subfolder
32995 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32997 \begin_inset Newline newline
33000 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33001 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33002 but in most cases these are
33018 is the language code.
33021 \begin_layout Subsection
33025 \begin_layout Standard
33028 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33029 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33031 \begin_inset space ~
33034 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33037 you can set the following things:
33040 \begin_layout Description
33042 \begin_inset space ~
33045 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33046 should use for spell checking.
33047 Depending on your platform,
33061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33062 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33063 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33078 \begin_inset space ~
33081 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33084 \begin_layout Description
33086 \begin_inset space ~
33089 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33090 will always use the given language
33091 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33094 \begin_layout Description
33096 \begin_inset space ~
33099 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33105 \begin_inset space \space{}
33109 This should normally not be needed.
33112 \begin_layout Description
33114 \begin_inset space ~
33118 \begin_inset space ~
33121 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33133 \begin_layout Description
33135 \begin_inset space ~
33138 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33139 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33140 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33141 appear in a context menu.
33142 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33146 \begin_layout Description
33148 \begin_inset space ~
33152 \begin_inset space ~
33156 \begin_inset space ~
33159 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33163 \begin_layout Section
33165 \begin_inset Index idx
33168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33177 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33184 \begin_layout Standard
33186 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33187 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33199 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33208 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33210 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33211 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33212 which are available for many languages.
33215 \begin_layout Standard
33216 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33217 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33221 \begin_layout Subsection
33222 Setting up the thesaurus
33225 \begin_layout Standard
33234 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33238 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33243 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33249 \begin_inset space ~
33257 For instance, the US English files are named:
33260 \begin_layout Itemize
33264 \begin_layout Itemize
33268 \begin_layout Standard
33277 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33278 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33281 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33282 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33283 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33285 \begin_inset space ~
33290 ) to the path where they are installed.
33294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33295 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33296 ies, typical locations are
33302 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33306 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33310 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33313 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33319 LibreOffice-<Version>
33326 On the Mac, the default location is
33328 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33329 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33330 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33331 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33332 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33333 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33341 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33342 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33343 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33347 \begin_layout Standard
33348 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33349 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33353 \begin_layout Itemize
33354 \begin_inset Flex URL
33357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33359 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33367 \begin_layout Standard
33368 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33369 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33371 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33372 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33373 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33375 \begin_inset space ~
33380 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33382 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33383 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33387 \begin_layout Standard
33388 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33390 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33393 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33399 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33402 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33403 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33411 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33412 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33413 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33420 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33423 \begin_layout Subsection
33424 Using the thesaurus
33427 \begin_layout Standard
33428 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33433 or the toolbar button
33436 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33439 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33441 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33443 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33444 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33445 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33454 ), related terms (such as
33457 \begin_inset space ~
33466 ), compounds (such as
33469 \begin_inset space ~
33478 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33487 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33490 \begin_layout Standard
33491 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33492 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33496 \begin_layout Standard
33497 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33498 the dictionary, such as the above
33502 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33507 \begin_inset space \space{}
33510 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33511 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33512 For example, looking up the word form
33516 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33521 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33526 \begin_inset space \space{}
33537 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33538 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33539 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33542 \begin_layout Section
33544 \begin_inset Index idx
33547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33554 \begin_inset Index idx
33557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33558 Document ! Change Tracking
33564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33566 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33573 \begin_layout Standard
33574 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33575 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33576 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33577 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33579 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33581 \begin_inset space ~
33584 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33586 \begin_inset space ~
33594 \begin_layout Standard
33595 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33609 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33610 You can change the color in
33612 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33613 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33624 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33630 \begin_inset Index idx
33633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33634 Color ! Change tracking
33639 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33640 's status bar when the
33641 cursor is in changed text.
33642 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33645 arg "changes-merge"
33651 \begin_layout Standard
33652 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33654 \begin_inset Index idx
33657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33666 \begin_layout Standard
33667 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33673 \begin_layout Standard
33674 \begin_inset Graphics
33675 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33683 \begin_layout Standard
33684 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33690 \begin_layout Standard
33691 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33694 \begin_layout Standard
33695 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33701 \begin_layout Standard
33702 \begin_inset Tabular
33703 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33704 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33705 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33706 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33707 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33716 arg "changes-track"
33724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33735 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33737 \begin_inset space ~
33746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33755 arg "changes-output"
33763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33769 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33771 \begin_inset space ~
33774 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33776 \begin_inset space ~
33780 \begin_inset space ~
33784 \begin_inset space ~
33793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33814 Jumps to the next change
33820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33829 arg "change-accept"
33837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33845 \begin_inset space ~
33848 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33850 \begin_inset space ~
33859 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33868 arg "change-reject"
33876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33884 \begin_inset space ~
33887 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33889 \begin_inset space ~
33898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33907 arg "changes-merge"
33915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33921 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33923 \begin_inset space ~
33926 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33928 \begin_inset space ~
33937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33946 arg "all-changes-accept"
33954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33962 \begin_inset space ~
33965 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33967 \begin_inset space ~
33971 \begin_inset space ~
33980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33989 arg "all-changes-reject"
33997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34005 \begin_inset space ~
34008 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34010 \begin_inset space ~
34014 \begin_inset space ~
34023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34047 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34049 \begin_inset space ~
34058 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34081 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34099 \begin_layout Standard
34100 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34106 \begin_layout Standard
34107 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34127 \begin_layout Standard
34128 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34129 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34130 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34131 the next change after the current cursor position.
34132 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34133 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34134 step to the next change.
34135 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34138 \begin_layout Standard
34139 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34140 to describe a change.
34143 \begin_layout Standard
34144 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34150 \begin_inset Index idx
34153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34155 -packages ! dvipost
34161 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34169 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34173 \begin_layout Section
34174 Comparison of Documents
34175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34177 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34182 \begin_inset Index idx
34185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34186 Comparison of documents
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34202 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34203 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34205 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34207 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34211 \begin_inset space ~
34215 \begin_inset space ~
34219 \begin_inset space ~
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34232 \begin_inset space ~
34236 \begin_inset space ~
34240 \begin_inset space ~
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34248 \begin_inset space ~
34253 enables the change tracking option
34256 \begin_inset space ~
34260 \begin_inset space ~
34264 \begin_inset space ~
34269 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34272 \begin_layout Section
34273 International Support
34274 \begin_inset Index idx
34277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34278 International support
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34287 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34288 with any language you want.
34289 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34290 up \SpecialChar LyX
34292 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34294 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34301 \begin_layout Standard
34302 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34303 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34304 \begin_inset space ~
34308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34310 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34317 \begin_layout Subsection
34319 \begin_inset Index idx
34322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34329 \begin_inset Index idx
34332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34333 Document ! Settings
34339 \begin_inset Index idx
34342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34343 Document ! Language
34351 \begin_layout Standard
34354 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34355 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34358 dialog lets you set
34360 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34365 \begin_layout Standard
34370 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34375 \begin_inset space ~
34380 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34381 For details about the different encoding options see section
34382 \begin_inset space ~
34386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34388 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34395 \begin_layout Subsection
34396 Keyboard mapping configuration
34397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34399 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34406 \begin_layout Standard
34407 If you have for example a U.
34408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34411 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34412 can use an alternate keymap.
34413 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34418 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34419 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34420 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34423 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34424 \begin_inset space ~
34428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34430 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34435 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34436 which one you want to use.
34439 \begin_layout Standard
34440 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34441 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34442 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34446 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34447 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34448 one to support the characters you want.
34449 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34456 \begin_layout Chapter
34459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34461 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34469 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34470 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34471 topic inside the user's guide.
34474 \begin_layout Section
34476 \begin_inset Index idx
34479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34488 \begin_layout Standard
34493 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34496 \begin_layout Subsection
34500 \begin_layout Standard
34501 Creates a new document.
34504 \begin_layout Subsection
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34509 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34510 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34511 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34514 \begin_layout Subsection
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34522 \begin_layout Subsection
34526 \begin_layout Standard
34527 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34528 Click there on a file to open it.
34531 \begin_layout Subsection
34535 \begin_layout Standard
34536 Closes the current document.
34539 \begin_layout Subsection
34543 \begin_layout Standard
34544 Closes all opened documents.
34547 \begin_layout Subsection
34551 \begin_layout Standard
34552 Saves the actual document.
34555 \begin_layout Subsection
34559 \begin_layout Standard
34560 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34563 \begin_layout Subsection
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34568 Saves all opened documents.
34571 \begin_layout Subsection
34575 \begin_layout Standard
34576 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34579 \begin_layout Subsection
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34584 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34585 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34586 It is described in the section
34588 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34593 Additional Features
34598 \begin_layout Subsection
34602 \begin_layout Standard
34603 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34604 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34606 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34607 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34611 \begin_layout Standard
34612 When using the menu entry
34615 \begin_inset space ~
34620 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34624 \begin_inset space ~
34628 \begin_inset space ~
34632 \begin_inset space ~
34637 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34638 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34641 \begin_layout Subsection
34643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34645 name "subsec:Export"
34652 \begin_layout Standard
34653 You can export your document to various file formats.
34654 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34656 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34657 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34658 during its configuration.
34661 \begin_layout Standard
34662 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34664 \begin_inset space ~
34668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34670 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34677 \begin_layout Description
34683 \begin_inset space ~
34686 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34691 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34692 \begin_inset Newline newline
34695 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34696 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34700 \begin_layout Description
34701 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34707 \begin_layout Description
34709 \begin_inset space ~
34712 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34718 \begin_layout Description
34719 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34720 's native DVI-format.
34721 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34722 files paths or file names in your document.
34724 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34731 \begin_layout Description
34732 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34733 in files paths or file names
34736 \begin_layout Description
34738 \begin_inset space ~
34745 ) DVI-format using the program
34747 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34750 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34754 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34762 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34770 \begin_layout Description
34772 \begin_inset space ~
34775 (cropped) the same as
34779 but with cropped page margins.
34782 \begin_layout Description
34784 \begin_inset space ~
34787 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34791 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34796 \begin_layout Description
34800 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34808 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34816 \begin_layout Description
34818 \begin_inset space ~
34822 \begin_inset space ~
34825 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34829 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34837 \begin_layout Description
34841 \begin_inset space ~
34850 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34851 source that is compilable with the program
34853 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34857 \begin_layout Description
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34866 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34867 source, additionally all images used in the document
34868 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34872 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34875 \begin_layout Description
34879 \begin_inset space ~
34884 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34885 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34886 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34894 \begin_layout Description
34898 \begin_inset space ~
34907 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34908 source that is compilable with the program
34914 \begin_layout Description
34916 \begin_inset space ~
34920 \begin_inset space ~
34927 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34928 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34934 \begin_layout Description
34936 \begin_inset space ~
34939 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34940 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34946 \begin_inset space \space{}
34951 \begin_inset space ~
34955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34970 represent the version number)
34973 \begin_layout Description
34975 \begin_inset space ~
34979 \begin_inset space ~
34982 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34983 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34984 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34988 \begin_layout Description
34989 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34990 's internal XHTML engine
34993 \begin_layout Description
34995 \begin_inset space ~
34999 \begin_inset space ~
35003 \begin_inset space ~
35007 \begin_inset space ~
35010 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35015 For the conversion the program
35024 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35027 \begin_layout Description
35028 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35033 \begin_layout Description
35035 \begin_inset space ~
35038 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35040 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35043 For the conversion the program
35052 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35055 \begin_layout Description
35057 \begin_inset space ~
35060 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35061 For the conversion the program
35070 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35073 \begin_layout Description
35075 \begin_inset space ~
35078 (cropped) the same as
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35086 but with cropped page margins
35089 \begin_layout Description
35093 \begin_inset space ~
35098 PDF-format using the program
35102 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35105 \begin_layout Description
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35113 \begin_inset space ~
35121 \begin_inset space ~
35126 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35131 \begin_inset space \space{}
35134 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35138 \begin_layout Description
35142 \begin_inset space ~
35147 PDF-format using the program
35149 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35152 , produces PDF-files directly
35155 \begin_layout Description
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35164 PDF-format using the program
35168 , produces PDF-files directly
35171 \begin_layout Description
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35180 PDF-format using the program
35184 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35187 \begin_layout Description
35191 \begin_inset space ~
35196 PDF-format using the program
35201 , produces PDF-files directly
35204 \begin_layout Description
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35216 \begin_layout Description
35220 \begin_inset space ~
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35229 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35230 and then exported as text using the program
35235 \begin_layout Description
35240 PostScript format using the program
35248 options see section
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35255 reference "subsec:General-output"
35262 \begin_layout Description
35263 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35264 source and also code in the statistical programming
35278 it is possible to use
35282 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35286 \begin_layout Standard
35287 If one of the menu entries
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35303 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35305 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35313 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35318 \begin_inset Index idx
35321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35322 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35331 \begin_layout Subsection
35335 \begin_layout Standard
35336 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35337 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35346 reference "sec:Paths"
35351 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35360 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35361 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35362 's preferences as described in section
35363 \begin_inset space ~
35367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35369 reference "subsec:Converters"
35376 \begin_layout Subsection
35377 New and Close Window
35380 \begin_layout Standard
35381 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35385 \begin_layout Subsection
35389 \begin_layout Standard
35390 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35393 \begin_layout Section
35395 \begin_inset Index idx
35398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35407 \begin_layout Subsection
35411 \begin_layout Standard
35412 Described in section
35413 \begin_inset space ~
35417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35419 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35426 \begin_layout Subsection
35427 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35430 \begin_layout Standard
35431 Described in section
35432 \begin_inset space ~
35436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35438 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35445 \begin_layout Subsection
35449 \begin_layout Standard
35450 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35451 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35454 \begin_layout Subsection
35458 \begin_layout Standard
35459 Selects the whole document.
35462 \begin_layout Subsection
35463 Find & Replace (Quick)
35466 \begin_layout Standard
35467 Described in section
35468 \begin_inset space ~
35472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35474 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35481 \begin_layout Subsection
35482 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35485 \begin_layout Standard
35486 Described in section
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35493 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35500 \begin_layout Subsection
35501 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35504 \begin_layout Standard
35505 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35509 \begin_layout Subsection
35513 \begin_layout Standard
35514 Described in section
35515 \begin_inset space ~
35519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35521 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35528 \begin_layout Subsection
35530 \begin_inset Index idx
35533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35534 Paragraph ! Settings
35542 \begin_layout Standard
35543 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35544 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35548 \begin_layout Standard
35549 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35550 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35557 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35559 \begin_inset space ~
35567 \begin_layout Subsection
35568 Table and Rows & Columns
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35572 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35573 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35574 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35577 \begin_layout Subsection
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35582 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35583 It will dissolve this inset.
35584 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35588 \begin_layout Subsection
35592 \begin_layout Standard
35593 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35594 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35597 \begin_layout Subsection
35598 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35601 \begin_layout Standard
35602 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35604 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35605 \begin_inset space ~
35609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35611 reference "sec:Nesting"
35616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35618 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35625 \begin_layout Subsection
35628 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35631 \begin_layout Standard
35632 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35633 nts of the same type.
35635 \begin_inset space ~
35639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35641 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35645 for an explanation.
35648 \begin_layout Section
35650 \begin_inset Index idx
35653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35662 \begin_layout Standard
35663 At the bottom of the
35667 menu the opened documents are listed.
35670 \begin_layout Subsection
35671 Open/Close all Insets
35674 \begin_layout Standard
35675 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35678 \begin_layout Subsection
35679 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35682 \begin_layout Standard
35683 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35686 \begin_layout Standard
35687 Math macros are described in the
35694 \begin_layout Subsection
35698 \begin_layout Standard
35699 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35700 \begin_inset space ~
35704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35706 reference "sec:Navigating"
35711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35713 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35720 \begin_layout Subsection
35724 \begin_layout Standard
35725 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35727 \begin_inset space ~
35731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35733 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35740 \begin_layout Subsection
35744 \begin_layout Standard
35745 Opens a window showing console messages.
35746 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35751 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35752 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35753 is processing the document.
35756 \begin_layout Subsection
35758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35760 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35765 \begin_inset Index idx
35768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35777 \begin_layout Standard
35778 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35779 All toolbars and the
35782 \begin_inset space ~
35787 can be turned on and off.
35792 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35816 \begin_inset space ~
35821 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35825 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35832 \begin_layout Standard
35837 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35841 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35842 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35843 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35844 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35845 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35848 \begin_layout Standard
35850 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35851 \begin_inset space ~
35855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35857 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35864 \begin_layout Subsection
35868 \begin_layout Standard
35872 \begin_inset space ~
35876 \begin_inset space ~
35880 \begin_inset space ~
35884 \begin_inset space ~
35888 \begin_inset space ~
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35897 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35898 's main window vertically while
35901 \begin_inset space ~
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35909 \begin_inset space ~
35913 \begin_inset space ~
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35926 will split it horizontally.
35927 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35928 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35929 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35930 three or more documents at the same time.
35931 To close a split view, use the menu
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35938 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_layout Subsection
35950 \begin_layout Standard
35951 Closes a split view.
35954 \begin_layout Subsection
35958 \begin_layout Standard
35959 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35960 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35961 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35962 's main window fullscreen.
35963 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35964 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35967 \begin_layout Section
35969 \begin_inset Index idx
35972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35981 \begin_layout Subsection
35985 \begin_layout Standard
35986 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35987 \begin_inset space ~
35991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35993 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36004 \begin_layout Subsection
36006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36008 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36015 \begin_layout Standard
36016 Here you can insert the following characters:
36019 \begin_layout Description
36024 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36027 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36028 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36029 -packages you have installed.
36030 You can get a complete display by checking
36033 \begin_inset space ~
36039 \begin_inset Newline newline
36043 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36051 Not all characters will be visible in the
36055 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36056 dialog (see section
36057 \begin_inset space ~
36061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36063 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36067 ) can display every character.
36075 \begin_layout Description
36076 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36080 \begin_layout Description
36082 \begin_inset space ~
36086 \begin_inset space ~
36089 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36096 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36103 \begin_layout Description
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36108 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36118 \begin_layout Description
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36123 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36133 \begin_layout Description
36135 \begin_inset space ~
36138 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36142 \begin_layout Description
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36147 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36151 \begin_layout Description
36153 \begin_inset space ~
36156 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36162 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36168 \begin_layout Description
36170 \begin_inset space ~
36173 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36177 \begin_layout Description
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36183 \begin_inset Index idx
36186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36193 \begin_inset Index idx
36196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36197 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36202 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36203 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36205 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36211 \begin_inset Index idx
36214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36222 \begin_inset Newline newline
36225 More information about this feature can be found in the
36231 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36237 \begin_layout Description
36238 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36240 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36241 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36245 \begin_layout Subsection
36249 \begin_layout Standard
36250 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36253 \begin_layout Description
36254 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36255 \begin_inset script superscript
36257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36266 \begin_layout Description
36267 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36268 \begin_inset script subscript
36270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36279 \begin_layout Description
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36284 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36291 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36298 \begin_layout Description
36300 \begin_inset space ~
36303 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36304 \begin_inset space ~
36308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36310 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36317 \begin_layout Description
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36322 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36323 \begin_inset space ~
36327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36329 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36336 \begin_layout Description
36338 \begin_inset space ~
36341 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36347 \begin_inset space \space{}
36350 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36351 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36360 To insert a fraction use the command
36365 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36369 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36378 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36385 \begin_layout Description
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36390 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36391 \begin_inset space ~
36395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36397 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36404 \begin_layout Description
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36409 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36416 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36423 \begin_layout Description
36425 \begin_inset space ~
36428 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36429 \begin_inset space ~
36433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36435 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36442 \begin_layout Description
36443 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36444 \begin_inset space ~
36448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36450 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36457 \begin_layout Description
36459 \begin_inset space ~
36462 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36463 \begin_inset space ~
36467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36469 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36476 \begin_layout Description
36478 \begin_inset space ~
36481 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36488 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36495 \begin_layout Description
36497 \begin_inset space ~
36501 \begin_inset space ~
36504 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36505 \begin_inset space ~
36509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36511 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36518 \begin_layout Description
36520 \begin_inset space ~
36523 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36524 as described in section
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36531 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36538 \begin_layout Description
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36543 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36544 \begin_inset space ~
36548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36550 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36557 \begin_layout Description
36559 \begin_inset space ~
36562 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36563 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36571 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36578 \begin_layout Description
36580 \begin_inset space ~
36583 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36590 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36597 \begin_layout Description
36599 \begin_inset space ~
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36606 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36607 \begin_inset space ~
36611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36613 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36620 \begin_layout Subsection
36624 \begin_layout Standard
36625 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36629 \begin_inset space ~
36650 are described in section
36651 \begin_inset space ~
36655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36657 reference "sec:toc"
36666 is described in section
36667 \begin_inset space ~
36671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36673 reference "sec:Index"
36681 is described in section
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36688 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36694 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36697 is described in section
36698 \begin_inset space ~
36702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36704 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36711 \begin_layout Subsection
36715 \begin_layout Standard
36716 To insert floats, as described in section
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36723 reference "sec:Floats"
36727 and in detail the chapter
36734 \begin_inset space ~
36742 \begin_layout Subsection
36746 \begin_layout Standard
36747 To insert notes, described in section
36748 \begin_inset space ~
36752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36754 reference "sec:Notes"
36761 \begin_layout Subsection
36765 \begin_layout Standard
36766 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36768 Branches are described in section
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36775 reference "sec:Branches"
36782 \begin_layout Subsection
36786 \begin_layout Standard
36787 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36788 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36790 An example is the document class
36791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36798 with three custom insets.
36801 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36805 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36811 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36814 \begin_layout Subsection
36816 \begin_inset Index idx
36819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36828 \begin_layout Standard
36829 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36831 For more information see chapter
36833 External Document Parts
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36842 \begin_layout Subsection
36844 \begin_inset Index idx
36847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36856 \begin_layout Standard
36857 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36858 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36873 \begin_layout Subsection
36877 \begin_layout Standard
36882 dialog as described in section
36883 \begin_inset space ~
36887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36889 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36896 \begin_layout Subsection
36900 \begin_layout Standard
36905 as described in section
36906 \begin_inset space ~
36910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36912 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36919 \begin_layout Subsection
36923 \begin_layout Standard
36928 as described in section
36929 \begin_inset space ~
36933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36935 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36942 \begin_layout Subsection
36944 \begin_inset Index idx
36947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36954 \begin_inset Index idx
36957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36958 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
36966 \begin_layout Standard
36967 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
36968 Floats are described in section
36969 \begin_inset space ~
36973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36975 reference "sec:Floats"
36979 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
36981 Multi-page Captions
36986 \begin_inset space ~
36994 \begin_layout Subsection
36998 \begin_layout Standard
36999 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37000 \begin_inset space ~
37004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37006 reference "sec:Index"
37013 \begin_layout Subsection
37017 \begin_layout Standard
37018 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37019 \begin_inset space ~
37023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37025 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37032 \begin_layout Subsection
37036 \begin_layout Standard
37037 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37038 Tables are described in section
37039 \begin_inset space ~
37043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37045 reference "sec:Tables"
37049 and in detail in the chapter
37056 \begin_inset space ~
37064 \begin_layout Subsection
37068 \begin_layout Standard
37074 Graphics are described in section
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37081 reference "sec:Graphics"
37088 \begin_layout Subsection
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37093 Inserts a URL as described in section
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37100 reference "subsec:URLs"
37107 \begin_layout Subsection
37111 \begin_layout Standard
37112 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37119 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37126 \begin_layout Subsection
37130 \begin_layout Standard
37131 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37132 \begin_inset space ~
37136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37138 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37145 \begin_layout Subsection
37149 \begin_layout Standard
37150 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37151 \begin_inset space ~
37155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37157 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37164 \begin_layout Subsection
37168 \begin_layout Standard
37169 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37170 title or caption of a float.
37171 Inserts a short title as described in section
37172 \begin_inset space ~
37176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37178 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37185 \begin_layout Subsection
37190 \begin_layout Standard
37191 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37192 Code box as described in section
37193 \begin_inset space ~
37197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37199 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37206 \begin_layout Subsection
37208 \begin_inset Index idx
37211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37220 \begin_layout Standard
37221 Inserts a program listings box.
37222 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37224 Program Code Listings
37229 \begin_inset space ~
37237 \begin_layout Subsection
37241 \begin_layout Standard
37242 Inserts the actual date.
37243 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37247 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37255 \begin_inset space ~
37263 \begin_layout Subsection
37267 \begin_layout Standard
37268 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37275 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37282 \begin_layout Section
37284 \begin_inset Index idx
37287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37296 \begin_layout Standard
37297 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37301 of the current document.
37302 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37305 \begin_layout Subsection
37309 \begin_layout Standard
37310 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37311 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37312 to jump, for example, between section
37313 \begin_inset space ~
37317 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37321 2.5 and use the submenu
37324 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \begin_inset space ~
37335 \begin_inset space ~
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37351 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37355 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37361 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37364 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37367 \begin_layout Standard
37368 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37377 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37385 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37388 \begin_layout Subsection
37389 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37392 \begin_layout Standard
37393 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37397 \begin_layout Subsection
37401 \begin_layout Standard
37402 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37403 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37404 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37420 \begin_layout Subsection
37424 \begin_layout Standard
37425 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37428 The \SpecialChar LyX
37429 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37431 \begin_inset space ~
37439 \begin_inset space ~
37444 manual for a detailed description.
37447 \begin_layout Section
37449 \begin_inset Index idx
37452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37461 \begin_layout Subsection
37465 \begin_layout Standard
37466 Change Tracking is described in section
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37473 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37480 \begin_layout Subsection
37488 \begin_layout Standard
37489 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37490 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37491 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37493 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37494 to the clipboard or update the view.
37495 \begin_inset Newline newline
37498 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37502 \begin_layout Standard
37505 Open Containing Directory
37507 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37508 's temporary folder for the document.
37509 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37510 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37511 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37512 For example some journals require to send the
37516 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37520 \begin_layout Subsection
37521 Start Appendix Here
37524 \begin_layout Standard
37525 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37526 as described in section
37527 \begin_inset space ~
37531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37533 reference "sec:Appendices"
37540 \begin_layout Subsection
37542 \begin_inset space ~
37548 \begin_layout Standard
37549 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37550 default output format for the document (menu
37552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37553 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37554 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37560 \begin_inset space ~
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37572 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37576 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37579 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37580 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37582 \begin_inset space ~
37585 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37590 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37596 \begin_inset space ~
37602 \begin_inset space ~
37606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37608 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37612 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37613 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37615 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37616 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37621 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37626 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37636 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37641 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37642 when it is first configured.
37643 The default output format is
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37654 \begin_layout Subsection
37655 View (Other Formats)
37658 \begin_layout Standard
37659 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37660 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37661 actual document with an external program.
37662 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37663 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37664 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37666 All possible formats are listed in section
37667 \begin_inset space ~
37671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37673 reference "subsec:Export"
37678 You should at least see the menu entry
37683 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37685 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37693 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37698 \begin_inset Index idx
37701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37702 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37711 \begin_layout Standard
37712 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37713 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37715 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37716 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37721 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37723 \begin_inset space ~
37726 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37730 \begin_inset space ~
37734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37736 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37741 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37742 when it is first configured.
37745 \begin_layout Subsection
37747 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_layout Standard
37754 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37755 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37758 \begin_layout Subsection
37759 Update (Other Formats)
37762 \begin_layout Standard
37763 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37764 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37767 \begin_layout Subsection
37768 View Master Document
37771 \begin_layout Standard
37772 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37788 \begin_inset space ~
37793 manual for more information on this topic).
37794 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37795 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37799 \begin_inset space ~
37803 \begin_inset space ~
37808 generates the output of the whole book, while
37812 will just output the chapter alone.
37815 \begin_layout Standard
37816 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37817 in the document settings (menu
37819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37820 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37821 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37823 \begin_inset space ~
37827 \begin_inset space ~
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37839 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37843 ) or in the preferences (menu
37845 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37846 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37848 \begin_inset space ~
37851 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37853 \begin_inset space ~
37856 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37862 \begin_inset space ~
37868 \begin_inset space ~
37872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37874 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37881 \begin_layout Subsection
37882 Update Master Document
37885 \begin_layout Standard
37886 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37902 \begin_inset space ~
37907 manual for more information on this topic).
37908 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37909 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37912 \begin_layout Standard
37913 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37914 in the document settings (menu
37916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37917 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37918 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37920 \begin_inset space ~
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37930 \begin_inset space ~
37934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37936 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37940 ) or in the preferences (menu
37942 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37943 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37945 \begin_inset space ~
37948 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37953 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37955 \begin_inset space ~
37959 \begin_inset space ~
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37971 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37978 \begin_layout Subsection
37980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37982 name "subsec:Compressed"
37989 \begin_layout Standard
37990 Un/compresses the current document.
37991 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37992 compression (see the
37994 Additional Features
37996 manual for details).
37999 \begin_layout Subsection
38003 \begin_layout Standard
38004 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38007 \begin_layout Subsection
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38012 The document settings are described in appendix
38013 \begin_inset space ~
38017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38019 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38026 \begin_layout Section
38028 \begin_inset Index idx
38031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38040 \begin_layout Subsection
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 Spell checking is explained in section
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38052 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38059 \begin_layout Subsection
38063 \begin_layout Standard
38064 The thesaurus is described in section
38065 \begin_inset space ~
38069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38071 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38078 \begin_layout Subsection
38080 \begin_inset Index idx
38083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38090 \begin_inset Index idx
38093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38102 \begin_layout Standard
38103 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38104 the highlighted document part.
38107 \begin_layout Subsection
38113 \begin_inset Index idx
38116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38117 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38126 \begin_layout Standard
38127 Generates with the help of the program
38129 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38132 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38133 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38134 This feature is not available on Windows.
38137 \begin_layout Subsection
38143 \begin_inset Index idx
38146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38156 \begin_layout Standard
38157 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38162 \begin_inset space ~
38167 to see the full filename paths.
38170 \begin_layout Subsection
38172 \begin_inset Index idx
38175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 \begin_layout Standard
38185 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38186 files as described in section
38187 \begin_inset space ~
38191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38193 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38200 \begin_layout Subsection
38202 \begin_inset Index idx
38205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38218 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38236 \begin_inset Index idx
38239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38240 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38249 \begin_layout Standard
38250 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38251 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38252 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38253 -packages and programs it needs; see
38255 \begin_inset space ~
38259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38261 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38268 \begin_layout Subsection
38272 \begin_layout Standard
38277 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38284 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38291 \begin_layout Section
38293 \begin_inset Index idx
38296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38305 \begin_layout Standard
38306 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38307 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38309 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38313 \begin_layout Standard
38317 \begin_inset space ~
38322 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38323 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38324 packages and classes found
38325 by \SpecialChar LyX
38327 \begin_inset space ~
38331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38333 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38340 \begin_layout Standard
38344 \begin_inset space ~
38349 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38354 \begin_layout Section
38356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38358 name "sec:Toolbars"
38365 \begin_layout Standard
38366 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38367 \begin_inset space ~
38371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38373 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38380 \begin_layout Standard
38381 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38382 This is described in the
38384 Additional Features
38389 \begin_layout Subsection
38391 \begin_inset Index idx
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 \begin_layout Standard
38404 \begin_inset Graphics
38405 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38413 \begin_layout Standard
38414 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38420 \begin_layout Standard
38421 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38438 \begin_inset Note Note
38441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38442 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38447 manual for more information.
38455 \begin_layout Standard
38456 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38462 \begin_layout Standard
38463 \begin_inset Tabular
38464 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38465 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38466 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38467 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38473 \begin_inset Graphics
38474 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38488 pull-down box for the environments
38501 \begin_layout Standard
38502 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38508 \begin_layout Standard
38510 \begin_inset Tabular
38511 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38512 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38513 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38514 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38538 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38568 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38598 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38614 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38628 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38644 arg "spelling-continuously"
38652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38656 Spellcheck continuously
38662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38685 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38715 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38722 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38745 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38775 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38782 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38805 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38812 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38821 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38861 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38875 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38903 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38917 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38918 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38946 Emphasize text, function of the
38948 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38950 \begin_inset space ~
38953 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38983 Set text to noun style, function of the
38985 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38987 \begin_inset space ~
38990 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39008 arg "textstyle-apply"
39016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39020 Format text using the current settings in the
39022 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39024 \begin_inset space ~
39027 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39060 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39062 \begin_inset space ~
39071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39080 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39108 arg "tabular-insert"
39116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39122 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39129 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39138 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39150 Toggle outline window on/off,
39152 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39168 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39180 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39195 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39207 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39220 \begin_layout Subsection
39222 \begin_inset Index idx
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39234 \begin_layout Standard
39235 \begin_inset Graphics
39236 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39244 \begin_layout Standard
39245 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39251 \begin_layout Standard
39252 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39256 \begin_layout Standard
39257 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39263 \begin_layout Standard
39264 \begin_inset Tabular
39265 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39266 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39267 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39268 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39305 arg "layout Enumerate"
39313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39332 arg "layout Itemize"
39340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39377 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39386 arg "layout Description"
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39413 arg "depth-increment"
39421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39427 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39429 \begin_inset space ~
39433 \begin_inset space ~
39442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39451 arg "depth-decrement"
39459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39465 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39467 \begin_inset space ~
39471 \begin_inset space ~
39480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39489 arg "float-insert figure"
39497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39504 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39520 arg "float-insert table"
39528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39535 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39595 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39611 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39657 \begin_inset space ~
39666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39675 arg "nomencl-insert"
39683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39691 \begin_inset space ~
39700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39709 arg "footnote-insert"
39717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39753 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39755 \begin_inset space ~
39764 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39787 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39788 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39790 \begin_inset space ~
39799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39808 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39829 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39859 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39884 \begin_inset space ~
39893 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39902 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39917 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39933 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39948 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39950 \begin_inset space ~
39959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39968 arg "dialog-show character"
39976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39982 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39987 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40003 arg "layout-paragraph"
40011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40017 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40019 \begin_inset space ~
40028 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40037 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40051 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40065 \begin_layout Subsection
40066 View/Update Toolbar
40067 \begin_inset Index idx
40070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40071 Toolbar ! View / Update
40079 \begin_layout Standard
40080 \begin_inset Graphics
40081 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40088 \begin_layout Standard
40089 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40095 \begin_layout Standard
40096 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40100 \begin_layout Standard
40101 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40107 \begin_layout Standard
40108 \begin_inset Tabular
40109 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40110 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40111 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40112 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40113 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40143 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40152 arg "buffer-update"
40160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40166 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40173 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40182 arg "master-buffer-view"
40190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40196 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40207 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40216 arg "master-buffer-update"
40224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40254 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40269 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40270 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40271 Synchronize with Output
40277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40301 View (Other Formats)
40307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40314 arg "update-others"
40322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40328 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40329 Update (Other Formats)
40342 \begin_layout Standard
40343 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40347 \begin_layout Subsection
40351 \begin_layout Standard
40352 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40359 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40363 , the table toolbar
40364 \begin_inset Index idx
40367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40376 \begin_inset space ~
40381 manual and the math macro toolbar
40382 \begin_inset Index idx
40385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40398 \begin_layout Chapter
40399 The Document Settings
40400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40402 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40407 \begin_inset Index idx
40410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40411 Document ! Settings
40419 \begin_layout Standard
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40428 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40429 is called with the menu
40431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40435 You can save your document settings as default with the
40437 Save as Document Defaults
40439 button in any dialog.
40440 This will create a template named
40444 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40445 when you create a new document without
40449 \begin_layout Standard
40454 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40455 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40458 \begin_layout Standard
40459 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40460 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40461 to find the one you are looking for.
40462 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40463 the submenus of the dialog.
40465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40469 \begin_inset space \space{}
40473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40480 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40481 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40482 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40485 \begin_layout Section
40489 \begin_layout Standard
40490 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40492 Document classes are described in section
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40499 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40507 \begin_layout Standard
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40516 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40521 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40522 as a layout for a document class.
40523 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40525 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40534 \begin_layout Standard
40535 Some classes use special class options by default.
40536 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40540 and you can decide to use them or not.
40541 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40542 recommended you leave them untouched.
40547 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40548 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40553 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40555 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40561 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40562 \begin_inset Newline newline
40567 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40570 \begin_inset Newline newline
40573 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40574 distribution, see section
40579 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40581 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40593 \begin_layout Standard
40598 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40599 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40600 in the background if the child document
40601 is opened without its master.
40602 This way child documents are always compilable.
40603 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40619 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40630 \begin_inset Index idx
40633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40635 -packages ! prettyref
40641 \begin_inset Index idx
40644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40646 -packages ! refstyle
40651 for cross-references, see section
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40658 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40665 \begin_layout Section
40669 \begin_layout Standard
40670 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40671 Please refer to the section
40674 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_inset space ~
40687 manual for details.
40690 \begin_layout Section
40694 \begin_layout Standard
40695 Modules are explained in section
40696 \begin_inset space ~
40700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40702 reference "subsec:Modules"
40709 \begin_layout Section
40713 \begin_layout Standard
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40721 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40728 \begin_layout Section
40732 \begin_layout Standard
40733 The document font settings are described in section
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40740 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40747 \begin_layout Section
40751 \begin_layout Standard
40752 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40764 \begin_inset space ~
40769 and whether it should be a
40772 \begin_inset space ~
40777 can also be specified here.
40780 \begin_layout Standard
40781 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40782 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40783 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40785 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40788 \begin_layout Standard
40791 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40794 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40795 justifies the text on screen.
40796 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40800 \begin_layout Section
40804 \begin_layout Standard
40805 This dialog is described in sections
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40812 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40819 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40826 \begin_layout Section
40830 \begin_layout Standard
40831 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40838 reference "subsec:Margins"
40845 \begin_layout Section
40847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40849 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40854 \begin_inset Index idx
40857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40858 Language ! Encoding
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40867 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40868 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40869 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40871 is always encoded in utf8).
40872 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40873 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40874 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40875 -command is not known for
40876 a particular character).
40879 \begin_layout Standard
40880 If you use the option
40885 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40886 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40887 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40889 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40890 exactly one encoding.
40891 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40894 \begin_layout Standard
40896 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40897 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40898 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40899 installation supports Unicode), choose
40900 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40901 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40902 is quite incomplete, so
40903 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40908 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40909 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40910 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40911 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40912 -commands is not used, because all
40913 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40914 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40915 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40916 , two new alternative engines
40917 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40919 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40921 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40952 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40957 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40961 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40964 \begin_layout Standard
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40973 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40974 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40984 The possible settings are:
40987 \begin_layout Description
40988 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40990 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40991 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41001 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41008 \begin_layout Description
41009 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41010 format you will use.
41011 In many cases this will be
41016 \begin_inset Index idx
41019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41027 If the newer package
41032 \begin_inset Index idx
41035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41037 -packages ! polyglossia
41042 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41043 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41044 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41046 this package will be used instead of
41053 \begin_layout Description
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41066 would be more appropriate.
41069 \begin_layout Description
41070 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41071 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41075 (for German texts), type in
41078 \begin_inset Newline newline
41083 usepackage{ngerman}
41086 \begin_layout Description
41087 None will not use a language package.
41088 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41091 \begin_layout Standard
41092 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41095 \begin_layout Description
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41112 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41118 \begin_inset Index idx
41121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41123 -packages ! inputenc
41129 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41130 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41131 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41135 \begin_layout Description
41136 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41138 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41139 commands, which may result in a big
41140 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41141 -commands are needed.
41144 \begin_layout Description
41146 \begin_inset space ~
41150 \begin_inset space ~
41153 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41156 \begin_layout Description
41158 \begin_inset space ~
41162 \begin_inset space ~
41165 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41168 \begin_layout Description
41170 \begin_inset space ~
41173 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41176 \begin_layout Description
41178 \begin_inset space ~
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41185 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41186 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41189 \begin_layout Description
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41195 \begin_inset space ~
41198 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41202 \begin_layout Description
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41208 \begin_inset space ~
41211 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41212 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41215 \begin_layout Description
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41225 \begin_inset space ~
41228 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41248 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41249 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41252 \begin_layout Description
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41261 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41262 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41263 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41264 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41275 \begin_layout Description
41277 \begin_inset space ~
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41284 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41285 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41286 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41288 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41293 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_layout Description
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41308 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41311 \begin_layout Description
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41320 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41323 \begin_layout Description
41325 \begin_inset space ~
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41332 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41335 \begin_layout Description
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41340 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41343 \begin_layout Description
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41348 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41351 \begin_layout Description
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41360 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41363 \begin_layout Description
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41375 \begin_layout Description
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41381 \begin_inset space ~
41384 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41387 \begin_layout Description
41389 \begin_inset space ~
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41399 \begin_layout Description
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41405 \begin_inset space ~
41408 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41414 \begin_inset Index idx
41417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41424 , when using this, set the document language to
41429 \begin_layout Description
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41438 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41443 , when using this, set the document language to
41446 \begin_inset space ~
41452 \begin_layout Description
41454 \begin_inset space ~
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41461 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41467 \begin_inset Index idx
41470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41472 -packages ! japanese
41477 , when using this, set the document language to
41482 \begin_layout Description
41484 \begin_inset space ~
41488 \begin_inset space ~
41491 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41496 , when using this, set the document language to
41501 \begin_layout Description
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41507 \begin_inset space ~
41510 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41515 , when using this, set the document language to
41520 \begin_layout Description
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41525 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41528 \begin_layout Description
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41541 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41544 \begin_layout Description
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41557 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41558 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41559 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41562 \begin_layout Description
41564 \begin_inset space ~
41568 \begin_inset space ~
41574 \begin_layout Description
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41583 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41584 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41587 \begin_layout Description
41589 \begin_inset space ~
41593 \begin_inset space ~
41596 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41602 \begin_inset Index idx
41605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41612 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41615 \begin_layout Description
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41625 \begin_inset space ~
41628 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41635 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41638 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41645 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41646 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41648 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41651 \begin_layout Description
41653 \begin_inset space ~
41657 \begin_inset space ~
41660 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41666 \begin_inset Index idx
41669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41676 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41679 \begin_layout Description
41681 \begin_inset space ~
41684 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41690 \begin_inset Index idx
41693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41695 -packages ! inputenc
41701 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41705 \begin_layout Description
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41715 \begin_inset space ~
41718 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41719 \begin_inset space ~
41725 \begin_layout Description
41727 \begin_inset space ~
41731 \begin_inset space ~
41735 \begin_inset space ~
41738 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41739 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41740 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41744 \begin_layout Description
41746 \begin_inset space ~
41750 \begin_inset space ~
41754 \begin_inset space ~
41757 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41758 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41761 \begin_layout Section
41763 \begin_inset Index idx
41766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41773 \begin_inset Index idx
41776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41783 \begin_inset Index idx
41786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41787 Color ! Shaded boxes
41793 \begin_inset Index idx
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41797 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41805 \begin_layout Standard
41806 Here you can alter the font color for the
41810 (default: black), for
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41818 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41822 (default: white) and for
41825 \begin_inset space ~
41835 sets the color back to the default.
41838 \begin_layout Standard
41839 Clicking any button showing
41847 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41848 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41849 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41850 later more quickly.
41853 \begin_layout Standard
41854 Note, if you change the
41857 \begin_inset space ~
41862 font color and use the option
41865 \begin_inset space ~
41870 in the document settings under
41873 \begin_inset space ~
41878 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41879 \begin_inset space ~
41883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41885 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41892 \begin_layout Standard
41893 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41899 \begin_layout Standard
41903 \begin_inset space ~
41912 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41918 Code after a forced page break:
41921 \begin_layout Itemize
41922 For the page color:
41923 \begin_inset Newline newline
41930 pagecolor{color name}
41933 \begin_layout Itemize
41934 For the text color:
41935 \begin_inset Newline newline
41945 \begin_layout Standard
41946 You are restricted to one of
41982 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41989 \begin_inset space ~
41995 \begin_inset Newline newline
41998 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41999 names to refer to them:
42002 \begin_layout Itemize
42008 \begin_inset Newline newline
42013 page_backgroundcolor
42016 \begin_layout Itemize
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42026 \begin_inset Newline newline
42034 \begin_layout Itemize
42038 \begin_inset space ~
42044 \begin_inset Newline newline
42052 \begin_layout Itemize
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42062 \begin_inset Newline newline
42070 \begin_layout Standard
42071 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42074 \begin_inset space ~
42082 \begin_inset space ~
42090 \begin_layout Section
42094 \begin_layout Standard
42095 Here you can adjust the
42099 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42103 as described in section
42104 \begin_inset space ~
42108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42110 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42117 \begin_layout Section
42121 \begin_layout Standard
42122 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42128 \begin_inset Index idx
42131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42143 \begin_inset Index idx
42146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42148 -packages ! jurabib
42156 Sectioned bibliography
42158 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42164 \begin_inset Index idx
42167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42169 -packages ! bibtopic
42174 and you can select a
42178 for the generation of the bibliography.
42179 For a further description see section
42180 \begin_inset space ~
42184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42186 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42193 \begin_layout Section
42197 \begin_layout Standard
42198 Here you can define the
42202 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42204 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42210 reference "sec:Index"
42217 \begin_layout Section
42221 \begin_layout Standard
42222 The PDF properties are explained in section
42223 \begin_inset space ~
42227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42229 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42236 \begin_layout Section
42240 \begin_layout Standard
42241 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42242 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42248 \begin_inset Index idx
42251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42253 -packages ! amsmath
42263 \begin_inset Index idx
42266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42268 -packages ! amssymb
42278 \begin_inset Index idx
42281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42293 \begin_inset Index idx
42296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42308 \begin_inset Index idx
42311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42313 -packages ! mathdots
42323 \begin_inset Index idx
42326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42328 -packages ! mathtools
42338 \begin_inset Index idx
42341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42353 \begin_inset Index idx
42356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42358 -packages ! stackrel
42368 \begin_inset Index idx
42371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 -packages ! stmaryrd
42383 \begin_inset Index idx
42386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42388 -packages ! undertilde
42393 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42396 \begin_layout Description
42397 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42398 -errors in formulas,
42399 ensure that you have this enabled.
42402 \begin_layout Description
42403 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42404 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42405 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42409 \begin_layout Description
42410 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42413 \begin_inset space ~
42425 \begin_layout Description
42426 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42429 \begin_inset space ~
42441 \begin_layout Description
42442 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42453 \begin_layout Description
42454 mathtools is used for the math commands
42490 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42497 \begin_layout Description
42498 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42500 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42509 \begin_layout Description
42510 stackrel is used for the math command
42527 \begin_layout Description
42528 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42531 \begin_layout Description
42532 undertilde is used for the math command
42540 Accents for one Character
42549 \begin_layout Section
42553 \begin_layout Standard
42554 The float placement options are described in the section
42557 \begin_inset space ~
42565 \begin_inset space ~
42573 \begin_layout Section
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42578 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42580 Program Code Listings
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42593 \begin_layout Section
42597 \begin_layout Standard
42598 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42606 set to be used and set the
42611 The itemize environment is described in section
42612 \begin_inset space ~
42616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42618 reference "sec:Itemize"
42625 \begin_layout Standard
42626 You can furthermore specify a
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42634 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42635 command of the desired character.
42636 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42643 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42649 \begin_inset space \space{}
42653 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42663 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42664 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42676 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42677 -packages in the preamble (menu
42680 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42681 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42690 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42694 usepackage{textcomp}
42697 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42701 usepackage{amssymb}
42711 \begin_layout Section
42715 \begin_layout Standard
42716 Branches are described in section
42717 \begin_inset space ~
42721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42723 reference "sec:Branches"
42730 \begin_layout Section
42732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42734 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42741 \begin_layout Standard
42742 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42745 \begin_layout Description
42747 \begin_inset space ~
42751 \begin_inset space ~
42754 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42774 View Master Document
42775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42782 Update Master Document
42783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42790 menu or the toolbar.
42791 The default is set in
42793 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42794 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42796 \begin_inset space ~
42799 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42803 \begin_inset space ~
42807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42809 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42816 \begin_layout Description
42818 \begin_inset space ~
42822 \begin_inset space ~
42825 Output settings for the menu
42827 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42835 For a detailed description see section
42837 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42842 \begin_inset space ~
42850 \begin_layout Description
42852 \begin_inset space ~
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42859 Options offers settings for the export format
42867 \begin_inset space ~
42872 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42873 \begin_inset space ~
42876 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42880 \begin_inset space ~
42885 settings are described in detail in section
42887 Math Output in XHTML
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42901 \begin_inset space ~
42905 \begin_inset space ~
42910 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42913 \begin_layout Section
42921 \begin_layout Standard
42922 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42924 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42926 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42928 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42932 \begin_layout Standard
42933 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42934 -syntax is given in section
42935 \begin_inset space ~
42939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42941 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42948 \begin_layout Chapter
42954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42956 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42961 \begin_inset Index idx
42964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42973 \begin_layout Standard
42974 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42976 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42980 It has the following submenus.
42983 \begin_layout Section
42987 \begin_layout Subsection
42991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42992 User Interface File
42993 \begin_inset Index idx
42996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42997 Customization ! of toolbars
43003 \begin_inset Index idx
43006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43007 Customization ! of menus
43015 \begin_layout Standard
43016 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43017 interface (ui) file.
43018 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43026 \begin_layout Description
43031 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43034 \begin_layout Description
43041 the menu entries in popup context menus
43044 \begin_layout Description
43049 specifies the toolbar buttons
43052 \begin_layout Standard
43053 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43054 and edit the entries.
43057 \begin_layout Standard
43058 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43070 entries must be finished with an explicit
43095 and in the case of the
43096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43108 The syntax for the entries is:
43111 \begin_layout Standard
43112 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43143 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43146 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43147 -functions are listed in the menu
43149 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43151 \begin_inset space ~
43159 \begin_layout Standard
43160 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43166 \begin_layout Standard
43167 For example, assuming you use the menu
43169 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43172 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43176 \begin_layout Standard
43177 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43201 \begin_layout Standard
43203 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43218 to have the sixth bookmark.
43221 \begin_layout Standard
43225 \begin_inset space ~
43230 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43231 's toolbar buttons.
43232 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43233 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43236 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43247 \begin_layout Standard
43250 Enable tool tips in main work area
43252 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43260 \begin_layout Standard
43265 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43266 should display in the menu
43268 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43270 \begin_inset space ~
43278 \begin_layout Subsection
43282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43286 \begin_layout Standard
43289 Restore window layouts and geometries
43292 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43293 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43297 \begin_layout Standard
43300 Restore cursor positions
43302 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43306 \begin_layout Standard
43309 Load opened files from last session
43311 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43315 \begin_layout Standard
43318 Clear all session information
43320 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43321 sessions (cursor positions, names
43322 of last opened documents, etc.).
43325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43329 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43334 \begin_inset Index idx
43337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43346 \begin_layout Standard
43349 Backup original documents when saving
43351 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43352 it was saved the last time.
43353 It is stored in the
43356 \begin_inset space ~
43362 \begin_inset space ~
43366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43368 reference "sec:Paths"
43372 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43381 The backup file has the file extension
43382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43396 \begin_layout Standard
43399 Backup documents, every
43401 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43404 \begin_layout Standard
43407 Save documents compressed by default
43409 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43410 \begin_inset space ~
43414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43416 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43421 This applies to newly created documents only.
43422 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43426 Windows & work area
43429 \begin_layout Standard
43432 Open documents in tabs
43434 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43438 \begin_layout Standard
43443 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43450 \begin_inset space ~
43454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43456 reference "sec:Paths"
43460 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43467 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43468 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43469 of \SpecialChar LyX
43471 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43472 instance is created for each file.
43475 \begin_layout Standard
43478 Single close-tab button
43480 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43490 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43491 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43494 \begin_layout Standard
43495 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43503 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43504 before the change takes effect.
43512 \begin_layout Standard
43517 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43519 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43521 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43525 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43526 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43527 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43530 \begin_layout Subsection
43532 \begin_inset Index idx
43535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43544 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43551 \begin_layout Standard
43552 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43556 \begin_layout Standard
43557 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43565 This section only deals with the fonts
43569 the \SpecialChar LyX
43571 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43574 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43575 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43586 \begin_layout Standard
43587 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43604 (depends on the system) as its
43607 \begin_inset space ~
43623 \begin_layout Standard
43624 You can change the font size with the
43631 \begin_layout Standard
43636 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43641 points have the size of 1
43642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43646 \begin_inset space ~
43650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43652 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43657 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43662 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43663 \begin_inset space ~
43667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43669 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43676 \begin_layout Standard
43679 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43681 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43682 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43683 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43684 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43685 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43687 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43694 \begin_layout Subsection
43696 \begin_inset Index idx
43699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43700 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43707 \begin_inset Index idx
43710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43719 \begin_layout Standard
43720 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43721 by choosing an item in the
43722 list and selecting the
43729 \begin_layout Standard
43730 By checking the option
43734 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43737 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43747 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43750 \begin_layout Subsection
43752 \begin_inset Index idx
43755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43765 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43769 \begin_layout Standard
43774 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43775 This feature is described in section
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43782 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43789 \begin_layout Standard
43790 Checking the option
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43797 \begin_inset space ~
43801 \begin_inset space ~
43806 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43809 \begin_layout Section
43811 \begin_inset Index idx
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43823 \begin_layout Subsection
43827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43831 \begin_layout Standard
43834 Cursor follows scrollbar
43836 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43840 \begin_layout Standard
43841 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43842 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43843 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43846 \begin_layout Standard
43849 Scroll below end of document
43851 is self-explanatory.
43854 \begin_layout Standard
43855 In \SpecialChar LyX
43856 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43863 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43865 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43866 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43869 \begin_layout Standard
43872 Sort environments alphabetically
43874 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43877 \begin_layout Standard
43880 Group environments by their category
43882 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43885 \begin_layout Standard
43890 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43905 \begin_layout Standard
43906 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43911 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43912 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43916 \begin_layout Subsection
43918 \begin_inset Index idx
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43928 \begin_inset Index idx
43931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43932 Settings ! Shortcuts
43940 \begin_layout Standard
43945 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43947 Several binding files are available, among them:
43950 \begin_layout Description
43951 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43954 \begin_layout Description
43955 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43967 \begin_layout Description
43968 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43979 \begin_layout Standard
43980 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43985 , and binding files for special languages.
43986 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43991 \begin_inset space \space{}
43995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44003 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44004 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44005 will try to use the appropriate binding
44009 \begin_layout Standard
44010 Some binding files, like
44014 , only have a limited scope.
44015 When looking at the end of the file
44019 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44022 \begin_layout Standard
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44030 \begin_inset space ~
44035 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44036 in the selected key binding file.
44039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44043 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44048 \begin_inset Index idx
44051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44052 Key Bindings ! Editing
44060 \begin_layout Standard
44061 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44062 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44063 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44064 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44067 Show key-bindings containing
44070 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44071 Insert there for example as keyword
44072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44079 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44080 functions that contain
44081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44089 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44090 All \SpecialChar LyX
44091 functions are also listed in the file
44096 that you will find in the
44103 \begin_layout Standard
44104 For example, to add the shortcut
44112 , select the function and press the
44117 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44118 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44121 \begin_layout Standard
44122 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44123 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44125 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44126 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44128 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44133 \begin_layout Standard
44134 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44137 \begin_layout Standard
44138 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44140 The syntax of the entries is:
44143 \begin_layout Standard
44149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44168 \begin_layout Subsection
44170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44172 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44177 \begin_inset Index idx
44180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44187 \begin_inset Index idx
44190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44191 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44199 \begin_layout Standard
44200 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44201 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44202 provides keyboard maps.
44203 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44204 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44207 \begin_inset space ~
44211 \begin_inset space ~
44216 and select the keyboard map file named
44223 \begin_layout Standard
44232 keyboard map and, if you use the
44236 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44239 arg "keymap-primary"
44245 arg "keymap-secondary"
44248 respectively or toggle between them with
44251 arg "keymap-toggle"
44257 \begin_layout Standard
44258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44266 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44275 \begin_layout Standard
44276 You can also specify the mouse
44278 Wheel scrolling speed
44281 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44285 Middle mouse button pasting
44287 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44288 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44291 \begin_layout Standard
44299 \begin_inset space ~
44303 \begin_inset space ~
44308 you can select a key for zooming.
44309 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44312 \begin_layout Subsection
44316 \begin_layout Standard
44317 Input completion is described in section
44318 \begin_inset space ~
44322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44324 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44331 \begin_layout Section
44333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44340 \begin_inset Index idx
44343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44350 \begin_inset Index idx
44353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44362 \begin_layout Standard
44363 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44364 are normally determined during
44366 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44369 \begin_layout Description
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44374 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44375 's working directory.
44376 It is the default when you
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44395 \begin_layout Description
44397 \begin_inset space ~
44400 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44402 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44408 \begin_inset space ~
44416 \begin_layout Description
44418 \begin_inset space ~
44421 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44427 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44431 \begin_inset Newline newline
44435 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44447 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44448 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44456 \begin_layout Description
44458 \begin_inset space ~
44462 \begin_inset Index idx
44465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44471 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44472 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44473 \begin_inset space ~
44477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44479 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44487 will be used to save the backups.
44488 \begin_inset Newline newline
44491 Backup files have the ending
44492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44502 \begin_layout Description
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44507 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44508 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44510 \begin_inset Newline newline
44517 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44523 You can edit this file with the program
44532 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44533 in its preferences under
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44542 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44547 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44549 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44550 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44556 and \SpecialChar LyX
44557 need to be running the same time.
44558 \begin_inset Newline newline
44561 The pipe is also used for the
44565 feature, see section
44566 \begin_inset space ~
44570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44572 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44577 \begin_inset Newline newline
44580 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44581 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44582 \begin_inset Newline newline
44598 \begin_layout Description
44600 \begin_inset space ~
44603 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44606 \begin_layout Description
44608 \begin_inset space ~
44611 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44612 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44613 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44616 \begin_layout Description
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44621 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44627 You only need to specify it if you are using
44631 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44633 For \SpecialChar LyX
44638 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44642 \begin_layout Description
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44647 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44648 When \SpecialChar LyX
44649 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44650 to find it on the system.
44651 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44653 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44662 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44663 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44666 \begin_layout Description
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44671 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44672 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44673 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44674 code or in the document
44676 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44678 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44679 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44680 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44681 scanned for the input files.
44682 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44683 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44685 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44686 compilation may fail for some documents.
44689 \begin_layout Section
44693 \begin_layout Standard
44694 Here you can insert your
44703 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44705 \begin_inset space ~
44709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44711 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44715 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44718 \begin_layout Section
44720 \begin_inset Index idx
44723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44724 Language ! Settings
44730 \begin_inset Index idx
44733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44734 Settings ! Language
44742 \begin_layout Subsection
44744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44746 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44753 \begin_layout Description
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44759 \begin_inset space ~
44762 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44764 You can find its actual translation status here:
44765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44767 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44774 \begin_layout Description
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44779 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44780 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44781 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44782 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44799 The most widespread language package is
44804 \begin_inset Index idx
44807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44814 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44816 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44817 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44818 come with the alternative
44824 \begin_inset Index idx
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44829 -packages ! polyglossia
44834 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44835 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44841 The available selections are described in section
44842 \begin_inset space ~
44846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44848 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44855 \begin_layout Description
44857 \begin_inset space ~
44860 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44861 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44862 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44863 An example is the start command
44869 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44871 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44875 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44890 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44895 \begin_layout Description
44897 \begin_inset space ~
44905 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44906 command toggles the package on and off.
44909 \begin_layout Description
44911 \begin_inset space ~
44915 \begin_inset space ~
44918 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44922 \begin_layout Description
44924 \begin_inset space ~
44928 \begin_inset space ~
44931 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44935 \begin_layout Description
44937 \begin_inset space ~
44941 \begin_inset space ~
44944 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44945 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44946 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44948 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44955 \begin_layout Description
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44960 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44962 When this option is not set, the
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44970 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44972 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44983 \begin_layout Description
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44991 \begin_inset space ~
44997 When it is not set, the
45000 \begin_inset space ~
45005 is set to the end of the document.
45008 \begin_layout Description
45010 \begin_inset space ~
45014 \begin_inset space ~
45017 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45018 language will be underlined in blue.
45021 \begin_layout Description
45023 \begin_inset space ~
45027 \begin_inset space ~
45030 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45031 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45034 \begin_layout Description
45036 \begin_inset space ~
45039 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45040 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45041 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45042 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45045 \begin_layout Subsection
45049 \begin_layout Standard
45050 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45057 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45064 \begin_layout Section
45068 \begin_layout Subsection
45070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45072 name "subsec:General-output"
45079 \begin_layout Description
45081 \begin_inset space ~
45084 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45086 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45094 For a detailed description see section
45096 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_layout Description
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45114 Options Options for the program
45118 that is used for the export format
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45129 reference "subsec:Export"
45134 Possible options are listed in the
45139 \begin_inset Newline newline
45143 \begin_inset Flex URL
45146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45148 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45158 \begin_layout Description
45160 \begin_inset space ~
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45167 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45170 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45171 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45173 \begin_inset space ~
45179 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45182 \begin_layout Description
45184 \begin_inset space ~
45188 \begin_inset Index idx
45191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45198 \begin_inset Index idx
45201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45202 Settings ! Date format
45207 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45208 \begin_inset Newline newline
45212 \begin_inset Flex URL
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45217 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45223 \begin_inset Newline newline
45226 For example the format
45227 \begin_inset Newline newline
45231 \begin_inset Newline newline
45234 prints the date as day/month/year.
45237 \begin_layout Description
45239 \begin_inset space ~
45243 \begin_inset space ~
45246 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45247 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45250 \begin_layout Subsection
45256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45258 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45263 \begin_inset Index idx
45266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45267 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45276 \begin_layout Description
45278 \begin_inset space ~
45286 \begin_inset space ~
45290 \begin_inset space ~
45293 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45298 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45319 are used for Cyrillic.
45320 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45333 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45335 sets up in the background.
45336 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45339 \begin_layout Description
45341 \begin_inset space ~
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45349 \begin_inset space ~
45353 \begin_inset space ~
45356 options They only have an effect when the program
45360 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45363 \begin_layout Standard
45364 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45365 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45366 manuals of the applications.
45369 \begin_layout Description
45371 \begin_inset space ~
45374 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45375 \begin_inset space ~
45379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45381 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45388 \begin_layout Description
45390 \begin_inset space ~
45393 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45394 \begin_inset space ~
45398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45400 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45407 \begin_layout Description
45409 \begin_inset space ~
45412 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45419 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45426 \begin_layout Description
45432 \begin_inset space ~
45435 command Command for the program
45437 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45440 that is described in the section
45442 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45447 Additional Features
45452 \begin_layout Standard
45453 There are additionally the following options:
45456 \begin_layout Description
45458 \begin_inset space ~
45462 \begin_inset space ~
45466 \begin_inset space ~
45470 \begin_inset space ~
45475 \begin_inset space ~
45478 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45496 to separate folders.
45497 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45499 \begin_inset Index idx
45502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45509 \begin_inset Index idx
45512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45521 \begin_layout Description
45523 \begin_inset space ~
45527 \begin_inset space ~
45531 \begin_inset space ~
45535 \begin_inset space ~
45539 \begin_inset space ~
45543 \begin_inset space ~
45546 changes Removes all manually set
45552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45553 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45555 \begin_inset space ~
45560 dialog when changing the document class.
45563 \begin_layout Section
45565 \begin_inset space ~
45569 \begin_inset Index idx
45572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 \begin_layout Subsection
45583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45585 name "subsec:Converters"
45590 \begin_inset Index idx
45593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45602 \begin_layout Standard
45603 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45604 from one format to another.
45605 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45606 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45613 \begin_inset space ~
45618 field and press the
45623 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45627 \begin_inset space ~
45632 drop-down list, modify the
45636 field and press the
45643 \begin_layout Standard
45646 Converter File Cache
45652 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45654 Maximum Age (in days
45657 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45658 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45661 \begin_layout Standard
45662 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45663 definition, is described in the section
45674 \begin_layout Subsection
45676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45678 name "sec:File-Formats"
45683 \begin_inset Index idx
45686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45693 \begin_inset Index idx
45696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45705 \begin_layout Standard
45706 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45716 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45719 \begin_layout Standard
45720 You can also define the
45722 Default output format
45724 that is used when you use
45726 View, Update, View Master Document
45730 Update Master Document
45736 menu or the toolbar.
45739 \begin_layout Standard
45740 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45751 \begin_layout Standard
45752 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45754 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45755 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45756 This is done by specifying a
45761 More about this is described in the section
45772 \begin_layout Chapter
45773 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45775 \begin_inset Index idx
45778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45787 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45794 \begin_layout Standard
45796 \begin_inset space ~
45800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45802 reference "tab:Units"
45806 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45807 and used in this documentation.
45810 \begin_layout Standard
45811 \begin_inset Float table
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45836 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 \begin_inset Tabular
45845 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45846 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45847 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45848 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45849 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 scaled point (65536
46056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46134 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46207 % of original image width
46212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46523 \begin_layout Chapter
46525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46527 name "chap:Credits"
46534 \begin_layout Standard
46535 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46536 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46539 \begin_layout Itemize
46542 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46545 \begin_layout Itemize
46551 \begin_layout Itemize
46557 \begin_layout Itemize
46563 \begin_layout Itemize
46569 \begin_layout Itemize
46575 \begin_layout Itemize
46581 \begin_layout Itemize
46587 \begin_layout Itemize
46590 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46593 \begin_layout Itemize
46599 \begin_layout Itemize
46605 \begin_layout Itemize
46611 \begin_layout Itemize
46617 \begin_layout Itemize
46623 \begin_layout Itemize
46629 \begin_layout Itemize
46635 \begin_layout Itemize
46641 \begin_layout Itemize
46642 The \SpecialChar LyX
46644 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46653 \begin_layout Standard
46654 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46657 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46664 \begin_layout Bibliography
46665 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46666 LatexCommand bibitem
46672 The \SpecialChar LyX
46674 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46677 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46682 \begin_inset Newline newline
46686 \begin_inset Flex URL
46689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46691 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46699 \begin_layout Bibliography
46700 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46701 LatexCommand bibitem
46702 key "latexcompanion"
46706 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46708 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46709 Companion Second Edition.
46712 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46715 \begin_layout Bibliography
46716 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46717 LatexCommand bibitem
46722 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46725 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46729 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46732 \begin_layout Bibliography
46733 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46734 LatexCommand bibitem
46742 : A Document Preparation System.
46745 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46748 \begin_layout Bibliography
46749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46750 LatexCommand bibitem
46759 The \SpecialChar TeX
46763 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46766 \begin_layout Bibliography
46767 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46768 LatexCommand bibitem
46773 The \SpecialChar TeX
46775 \begin_inset Newline newline
46779 \begin_inset Flex URL
46782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46784 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46792 \begin_layout Bibliography
46793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46794 LatexCommand bibitem
46799 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46801 \begin_inset Newline newline
46805 \begin_inset Flex URL
46808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46810 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46818 \begin_layout Bibliography
46819 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46820 LatexCommand bibitem
46826 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46828 name "Documentation"
46829 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46835 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46839 \begin_inset Newline newline
46843 \begin_inset Flex URL
46846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46848 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46856 \begin_layout Bibliography
46857 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46858 LatexCommand bibitem
46864 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46866 name "Documentation"
46867 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46871 how to use the program
46873 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46877 \begin_inset Newline newline
46881 \begin_inset Flex URL
46884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46886 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46894 \begin_layout Bibliography
46895 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46896 LatexCommand bibitem
46902 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46904 name "Documentation"
46905 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46914 \begin_inset Newline newline
46918 \begin_inset Flex URL
46921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46923 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46931 \begin_layout Bibliography
46932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46933 LatexCommand bibitem
46934 key "makeindex-man"
46939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46942 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46951 \begin_inset Newline newline
46955 \begin_inset Flex URL
46958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46960 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46968 \begin_layout Bibliography
46969 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46970 LatexCommand bibitem
46976 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46978 name "Documentation"
46979 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46988 \begin_inset Newline newline
46992 \begin_inset Flex URL
46995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46997 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47005 \begin_layout Bibliography
47006 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47007 LatexCommand bibitem
47013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47015 name "Documentation"
47016 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47020 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47022 \begin_inset Newline newline
47026 \begin_inset Flex URL
47029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47031 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47039 \begin_layout Bibliography
47040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47041 LatexCommand bibitem
47047 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47049 name "Documentation"
47050 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47054 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47060 \begin_inset Index idx
47063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47065 -packages ! caption
47071 \begin_inset Newline newline
47075 \begin_inset Flex URL
47078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47080 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47088 \begin_layout Bibliography
47089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47090 LatexCommand bibitem
47096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47098 name "Documentation"
47099 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47103 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47109 \begin_inset Index idx
47112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47114 -packages ! enumitem
47120 \begin_inset Newline newline
47124 \begin_inset Flex URL
47127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47129 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47137 \begin_layout Bibliography
47138 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47139 LatexCommand bibitem
47145 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47147 name "Documentation"
47148 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47152 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47158 \begin_inset Index idx
47161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47163 -packages ! fancyhdr
47169 \begin_inset Newline newline
47173 \begin_inset Flex URL
47176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47178 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47186 \begin_layout Bibliography
47187 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47188 LatexCommand bibitem
47194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47196 name "Documentation"
47197 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47201 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47207 \begin_inset Index idx
47210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47212 -packages ! hyperref
47218 \begin_inset Newline newline
47222 \begin_inset Flex URL
47225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47227 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47235 \begin_layout Bibliography
47236 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47237 LatexCommand bibitem
47243 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47245 name "Documentation"
47246 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47250 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47256 \begin_inset Index idx
47259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47261 -packages ! nomencl
47267 \begin_inset Newline newline
47271 \begin_inset Flex URL
47274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47276 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47284 \begin_layout Bibliography
47285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47286 LatexCommand bibitem
47292 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47294 name "Documentation"
47295 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47299 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47305 \begin_inset Index idx
47308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47310 -packages ! prettyref
47316 \begin_inset Newline newline
47320 \begin_inset Flex URL
47323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47325 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47333 \begin_layout Bibliography
47334 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47335 LatexCommand bibitem
47341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47343 name "Documentation"
47344 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47348 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47354 \begin_inset Index idx
47357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47359 -packages ! refstyle
47365 \begin_inset Newline newline
47369 \begin_inset Flex URL
47372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47374 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47382 \begin_layout Bibliography
47383 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47384 LatexCommand bibitem
47390 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47393 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47397 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47399 \begin_inset Newline newline
47403 \begin_inset Flex URL
47406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47408 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47416 \begin_layout Bibliography
47417 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47418 LatexCommand bibitem
47424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47427 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47431 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47433 \begin_inset Newline newline
47437 \begin_inset Flex URL
47440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47442 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47450 \begin_layout Bibliography
47451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47452 LatexCommand bibitem
47458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47461 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47465 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47466 for Cyrillic languages:
47467 \begin_inset Newline newline
47471 \begin_inset Flex URL
47474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47476 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47484 \begin_layout Bibliography
47485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47486 LatexCommand bibitem
47492 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47495 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47499 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47501 \begin_inset Newline newline
47505 \begin_inset Flex URL
47508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47510 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47518 \begin_layout Bibliography
47519 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47520 LatexCommand bibitem
47526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47529 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47533 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47535 \begin_inset Newline newline
47539 \begin_inset Flex URL
47542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47544 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47552 \begin_layout Bibliography
47553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47554 LatexCommand bibitem
47560 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47563 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47567 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47569 \begin_inset Newline newline
47573 \begin_inset Flex URL
47576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47578 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47586 \begin_layout Bibliography
47587 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47588 LatexCommand bibitem
47594 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47597 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47601 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47603 \begin_inset Newline newline
47607 \begin_inset Flex URL
47610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47612 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47620 \begin_layout Bibliography
47621 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47622 LatexCommand bibitem
47628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47631 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47635 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47637 \begin_inset Newline newline
47641 \begin_inset Flex URL
47644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47646 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47654 \begin_layout Bibliography
47655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47656 LatexCommand bibitem
47662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47665 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47669 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47671 \begin_inset Newline newline
47675 \begin_inset Flex URL
47678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47680 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47688 \begin_layout Bibliography
47689 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47690 LatexCommand bibitem
47696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47699 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47703 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47705 \begin_inset Newline newline
47709 \begin_inset Flex URL
47712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47714 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47722 \begin_layout Bibliography
47723 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47724 LatexCommand bibitem
47730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47733 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47737 about new features in
47743 \begin_inset Newline newline
47747 \begin_inset Flex URL
47750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47752 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47760 \begin_layout Standard
47761 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47795 \begin_inset Note Note
47798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47805 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47806 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47807 bibliography is the second one:
47815 \begin_layout Standard
47816 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47817 LatexCommand bibtex
47818 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47819 options "biblio/alphadin"
47826 \begin_layout Standard
47827 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47831 \begin_layout Standard
47832 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47833 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47839 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47840 LatexCommand printindex